18-Channel Digital Proportional R/C System

TM

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

1M23Z05501

TABLE OF CONTENTSINTRODUCTION............................................... 4ƔDHFODUDWLRQRICRQIRUPLW\ IRU(U ................ 4Ɣ6.%U6:LULQJH[DPSOH................................... 3ƔDH¿QLWLRQVRI6\PEROV...................................... 5Ɣ6.%U66.%U62GHYLFHVHWWLQJ......................... 38

Ɣ6DIHW\3UHFDXWLRQV GRQRWRSHUDWHZLWKRXWUHDGLQJ ............................................................. 5Ɣ6.%U626\VWHP................................................ 37%$6ICO3(R$TION....................................... 39
Ɣ+RPHVFUHHQ.................................................... 39%()OR(U6(..................................................... 9ƔCRQWHQWVDQGWHFKQLFDOVSHFL¿FDWLRQV............. 9

Ɣ/LQNSURFHGXUH.............................................. 40

Ɣ6HOIQHXWUDOVWLFN............................................... 9
Ɣ$FFHVVRULHV....................................................... 10ƔIIWKHUHFHLYHU VYROWDJHGRHVQRWGLVSOD\RQ
WKHWUDQVPLWWHU............................................... 42ƔTUDQVPLWWHUFRQWUROV....................................... 11ƔRDQJHWHVWLQJ\RXURCV\VWHP...................... 43

Ɣ$IWHUVHWWLQJ..................................................... 41ƔTUDQVPLWWHU VDQWHQQD.................................... 12
Ɣ6ZLWFK 6$6+ ............................................... 13
Ɣ9ROXPH............................................................ 14
Ɣ/LQHU6OLGHU..................................................... 14ƔRRWDU\TULPV T1T ..................................... 15ƔIQVWDOOLQJUHPRYLQJWKHEDWWHU\..................... 1ƔTUDQVPLWWHUEDWWHU\........................................ 17
Ɣ+RZWRWXUQWUDQVPLWWHUSRZHUONO))..... 18ƔTRXFK3DQHO..................................................... 19
Ɣ+( +RPH([LW DQGU0 UVHUPHQX6HUYRPRQLWRU ........................................................... 19
Ɣ3DQHOORFN........................................................ 20ƔR)RIIPRGH..................................................... 20
Ɣ0RQLWRU/(DGLVSOD\...................................... 21
Ɣ6WLFNFRQWURO.................................................... 21
6WLFNFRQWURO $LUSODQH([DPSOH ................. 22
6WLFNFRQWURO +HOLFRSWHU([DPSOH .............. 23
6WLFNFRQWURO 0XOWLFRSWHU([DPSOH ............ 24
Ɣ6WLFN$GMXVWPHQW............................................ 25ƔTKURXJKKROORZVWLFNOHYHU............................ 2
Ɣ$GMXVWPHQWRITKURWWOH6WLFN RDWFKHW ........ 27ƔCRQQHFWRU3OXJ............................................... 29
Ɣ6DFDUG............................................................ 30ƔRHFHLYHUQRPHQFODWXUH................................... 31ƔRHFHLYHU VDQWHQQDLQVWDOODWLRQ...................... 33
Ɣ6DIHW\SUHFDXWLRQVZKHQLQVWDOOLQJVHUYRV... 34
Ɣ6.%U66.%U62IQVWDOODWLRQ............................ 35

0RGHO%DVLF6HWWLQJ3URFHGXUH........................ 44$LUSODQH........................................................... 44+HOLFRSWHU........................................................ 4
6HUYRVFRQQHFWLRQE\PRGHOW\SH.................. 49
6<6T(00(NU............................................... 55
DLVSOD\............................................................. 5
6RXQGYROXPH................................................. 57
DDWHDQGTLPH................................................. 57+:VHWWLQJ..................................................... 58%DWWHU\............................................................. 59
RDQJHFKHFN.........................................59 ĺ43
6.%XVVHUYR..................................................... 0
IQIRUPDWLRQ.................................................... 3/IN.$*(0(NU............................................ 4
6HUYRPRQLWRU................................................. 5
0RGHOVHOHFW.................................................... 
0RGHOW\SH...................................................... 96HUYRUHYHUVH................................................... 71(QGSRLQW......................................................... 72
6HUYRVSHHG..................................................... 73
6XEWULP.......................................................... 73)XQFWLRQ.......................................................... 74)DLOVDIH........................................................... 7
6\VWHPW\SH..................................................... 77
TULPVHWWLQJ T1T ...................................... 79
TKURWWOHFXW..................................................... 80

TABLE OF CONTENTS
IGOHGRZQ......................................................... 81
6ZDVKULQJ +HOLRQO\ .................................... 82
6ZDVK +HOLRQO\H[FHSW+1 ........................ 83
6WLFNDODUP...................................................... 85
TLPHU............................................................... 8)XQFWLRQQDPH................................................ 88
THOHPHWU\V\VWHP............................................ 89
6HQVRU.............................................................. 91
THOHPHWU\......................................................... 94
THOHPHWU\RHFHLYHU>%DWWHU\@........................ 95
THOHPHWU\RHFHLYHU>([WEDWW@....................... 9
THOHPHWU\THPSHUDWXUH................................. 97
THOHPHWU\R30VHQVRU.................................. 98
THOHPHWU\$OWLWXGH......................................... 99
THOHPHWU\$OWLWXGH>9DULRPHWHU@................ 100
THOHPHWU\9ROWDJH>%DWWHU\@........................ 103
THOHPHWU\9ROWDJH>([WEDWW@....................... 104
THOHPHWU\*36>DLVWDQFH@........................... 105
THOHPHWU\*36>6SHHG@................................ 107
THOHPHWU\*36>$OWLWXGH9DULRPHWHU3RVLWLRQ@ 108
THOHPHWU\6HUYRVHQVRU>CXUUHQW@.............. 109
THOHPHWU\6HUYRVHQVRU>THPSHUDWXUH$QJOH@110
THOHPHWU\CXUUHQWVHQVRU>CXUUHQW@...........111
THOH.VHWWLQJ THOHPHWU\VHWWLQJ .................. 112
TUDLQHU........................................................... 114:DUQLQJVHWWLQJ............................................ 117
UVHUPHQXVHWWLQJ......................................... 118
DDWDUHVHW...................................................... 119
0OD(/0(NU CRPPRQIXQFWLRQV .......... 120
CRQGLWLRQVHOHFW........................................... 121$)R.............................................................. 123
DXDOUDWH........................................................ 124
3URJUDPPL[HV............................................. 125
0OD(/0(NU $LUSODQH*OLGHU0XOWLFRSWHU$LOHURQGLIIHUHQWLDO....................................... 129)ODSVHWWLQJ.................................................... 130$I/→ CDPEHUÀDS...................................... 131$I/→ %UDNHÀDS......................................... 132$LOHURQ→ RXGGHU........................................ 133(OHYDWRU→CDPEHU..................................... 134
CDPEHUPL[LQJ............................................. 135$LUEUDNH → (/(.......................................... 137
CDPEHUÀDS → (/(..................................... 138
RXGGHU → $LOHURQ........................................ 139
RXGGHU → (OHYDWRU...................................... 140%XWWHUÀ\........................................................ 141
TULPPL[12.................................................. 144
6QDSUROO $LUSODQHRQO\ ............................. 145$LUEUDNH $LUSODQHRQO\ ............................ 14
*\UR.............................................................. 147$LOHYDWRU........................................................ 149$FFHOHUDWLRQ.................................................. 150
0RWRU............................................................. 151
9WDLO.............................................................. 152:LQJOHW.......................................................... 153
0OD(/0(NU +HOLFRSWHU
3LWFKFXUYH.................................................... 155
TKURWWOHFXUYH............................................... 158$FFHOHUDWLRQ.................................................. 10
TKURWWOHKROG................................................. 11
6ZDVKPL[LQJ................................................ 12
TKURWWOHPL[LQJ............................................. 13
3LWFK → NHHGOH.............................................. 14
3LWFK → RXGGHU RHYROXWLRQPL[LQJ ......... 15*\UR +HOLFRSWHU ......................................... 1
*RYHUQRU....................................................... 18
CRPPRQOSHUDWLRQVXVHGLQIXQFWLRQVHWXSVFUHHQ................................................................ 170
ƔOSHUDWLRQVYDOXHVHWWLQJ............................... 170
ƔOSHUDWLRQVUHODWHGWRÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV....... 170
ƔOSHUDWLRQVUHODWHGWR¿QHWXQLQJ9R.......... 171
ƔOSHUDWLRQVUHODWHGWRVHUYRVSHHG............... 172
ƔCXUYHVHWWLQJRSHUDWLRQ................................ 173
Ɣ6ZLWFKVHOHFWLRQPHWKRG............................... 177
ƔUSGDWLQJ........................................................ 181
Ɣ0RGHOGDWDFRQYHUVLRQ................................. 183

INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing a Futaba® FASSTest-2.4GHz* FX-36 series digital proportional R/C
system. This system is extremely versatile and may be used by beginners and pros alike. In orderfor you to make the best use of your system and to Ày safely please read this manual carefully.
If you have any difficulties Zhile using your system please consult the manual our online
FreTuently Asked 4uestions on the Zeb pages referenced beloZ  your hobby dealer or the
Futaba Service Center.
*FASSTest: Futaba Advanced Spread Spectrum Technology extend system telemetry'ue to unforeseen changes in production procedures the information contained in this manual issubject to change without notice.
Support and Service: It is recommended to have your Futaba equipment serviced annually during
your hobby’s “off season” to ensure safe operation.

DHFODUDWLRQRICRQIRUPLW\ IRU(UHereby Futaba Corporation declares that the radio equipment type is in compliance with 'irective 24/3/(8.
The full text of the (8 declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:

KWWSZZZ.UF.IXWDED.FR.MSHQJOLVKGOGHFODUDWLRQV.KWPO

4 ＜ Introduction ＞

3UHFDXWLRQV$SSOLFDWLRQ([SRUWDQG0RGL¿FDWLRQ3UHFDXWLRQV.
. This product is only designed for use with radio control models. 8se of the product described in this instruction manual islimited to radio control models.
2. (xport precautions:a :hen this product is exported it cannot be used where prohibited by the laws governing radio waves of the destination
country.
b 8se of this product with other than models may be restricted by (xport and Trade Control Regulations.
3. 0odi¿cation adjustment and parts replacement:
Futaba is not responsible for unauthorized modi¿cation adjustment or replacement of parts on this product.
Ŷ 1o part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without prior permission.
Ŷ The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
Ŷ The contents of this manual should be complete but if there are any unclear or missing parts please contact a Futaba Service
Center.
Ŷ Futaba is not responsible for the use of this product by the customer.
Ŷ Company and product names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective company.

)RUVDIHXVH
Please observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this product at all times.
Meaning of Special Markings:
The parts of this manual indicated by the following marks require special attention from the standpoint of safety.
DANGER  3URFHGXUHV ZKLFK PD\ OHDG WR GDQJHURXV FRQGLWLRQV DQG FDXVH GHDWKVHULRXV LQMXU\ LI QRW FDUULHG RXWSURSHUO\.
WARNING 3URFHGXUHVZKLFKPD\OHDGWRDGDQJHURXVFRQGLWLRQRUFDXVHGHDWKRUVHULRXVLQMXU\WRWKHXVHULIQRWFDUULHGRXWSURSHUO\RUSURFHGXUHVZKHUHWKHSUREDELOLW\RIVXSHU¿FLDOLQMXU\RUSK\VLFDOGDPDJHLVKLJK.
CAUTION 3URFHGXUHVZKHUHWKHSRVVLELOLW\RIVHULRXVLQMXU\WRWKHXVHULVVPDOOEXWWKHUHLVDGDQJHURILQMXU\RU
SK\VLFDOGDPDJHLIQRWFDUULHGRXWSURSHUO\.3URKLELWHG

0DQGDWRU\:$RNIN*$OZD\VNHHSHOHFWULFDOFRPSRQHQWVDZD\IURPVPDOOFKLOGUHQ.

Flying Precautions
WARNING

Never grasp the transmitter antenna while
ﬂying.
■ The transmitter output may drop drastically.

Always make sure that all transmitter stick
movements operate all servos properly in themodel prior to flight. Also, make sure that all
switches, etc. function properly as well. If there
are any diﬃculties, do not use the system until all
inputs are functioning properly.
Never ﬂy in range check mode.
■ In the dedicated range test range check mode, thetransmitter output range is reduced and may cause acrash.

While operating, never touch the transmitter
with, or bring the transmitter near, another transmitter, a cellphone, or other wireless devices.

■ The antenna is directional and the transmitter output
is weakest. (The strength of the radio waves is greatest
from the sides of the antenna.)

Never fly on a rainy day, when the wind isstrong, or at night.
■ Water could lead to failure or improper functionality
and poor control of the aircraft which could lead to acrash.

Never turn the power switch off during flightor while the engine or motor is running.
■ Operation will become impossible and the aircraft willcrash. Even if the power switch is turned on, operation
will not begin until transmitter and receiver internal
processing is complete.

Do not start the engine or motor while wearing
the neck strap.

■ Doing so may cause erroneous operation.

■ The neck strap may become entangled with the rotating propeller, rotor, etc. and cause a serious injury.

Do not point the antenna directly toward theaircraft during ﬂight.

Do not ﬂy when you are physically impaired as
it could pose a safety hazard to yourself or others.

＜ Introduction ＞ 5

Do not ﬂy at the following places:■ Near another radio control ﬂying ﬁeld.
■ Near or above people.
■ Near homes, schools, hospitals or other places where
people congregate.
■ Near high voltage lines, high structures, or communication facilities.

Do not touch the engine, motor, or ESC during
and immediately after use.
■ These items may become hot during use.

For safety, ﬂy so that the aircraft is visible at all
times.
■ Flying behind buildings or other large structures will
not only cause you to lose sight of the aircraft, but also degrade the RF link performance and cause loss ofcontrol.

the operation of both the teacher and student
transmitter.
■ Even one incorrect transmitter setting or aircraft abnormality can cause a crash.

Before turning on the transmitter:
1. Always move the transmitter throttle stick position to
the minimum (idle) position.
2. Turn on the transmitter ﬁrst and then the receiver.

When turning off the transmitter's powerswitch after the engine or motor has stopped(state in which it will not rotate again):
1. Turn oﬀ the receiver power switch.
2. Then turn oﬀ the transmitter power switch.
■ If the power switch is turned on/oﬀ in the opposite order, the propeller may rotate unexpectedly and cause
a serious injury.

From the standpoint of safety, always set the
fail safe function.

■ Also always observe the above order when setting thefail safe function.

■ In particular, normally set the throttle channel to idle.
For a helicopter, set the throttle channel to maintain ahover.

When adjusting the transmitter, stop theengine except when necessary. In the case of a
motor, disconnect the wiring that allows it to continue operation. When doing so, please exercise
extreme caution. Ensure that the aircraft is secured and that it will not come into contact withanything or anyone. Ensure that the motor will
not rotate prior to making any adjustments.

When ﬂying, always return the transmitter setup screen to the Home screen.
■ Erroneous input during ﬂight is extremely dangerous.

Always check the remaining capacity of thetransmitter and receiver batteries before each ﬂying session prior to ﬂight.

■ Unexpected high speed rotation of the engine may
cause a serious injury.

■ Low battery capacity will cause loss of control and acrash.

Always check operation of each control surface
and perform a range test before each ﬂying session. Also, when using the trainer function, check

Battery and Charger Handling Precautions
DANGER

Do not recharge a battery that is damaged, deteriorated, leaking electrolyte, or wet.

Do not charge and store the battery in direct
sunlight or other hot places.

Do not use the charger in applications otherthan as intended.

Do not charge the battery if it is covered withany object as it may become very hot.

Do not allow the charger or battery to become
wet.

Do not use the battery in a combustible environment.

■ Do not use the charger when it or your hands are wet.
Do not use the charger in humid places.

■ The combustibles may could ignite ignite and cause an
explosion or ﬁre.

Do not short circuit the battery.
Do not solder, repair, deform, modify, or disassemble the battery and/or battery charger.
Do not drop the battery into a fire or bring it
near a ﬁre.

6 ＜ Introduction ＞

Always charge the battery before each flying
session.
■ If the battery goes dead during ﬂight, the aircraft willcrash.

Charge the battery with the dedicated charger
supplied with the set.

■ Charging the battery past the specified value may
cause a fire, combustion, rupture, or liquid leakage.
When quick charging, do not charge the battery above
1C.
■ Do not charge the battery while riding in a vehicle. Vibration will prevent normal charging.

If the battery liquid should get in your eyes, do
not rub your eyes, but immediately wash themwith tap water or other clean water and get treated by a doctor.
■ The liquid can cause blindness.

Insert the power cord plug firmly into thereceptacle up to its base.
Always use the charger with the specified
power supply voltage.
■ Use the special charger by connecting it to a proper
power outlet.

WARNING

Do not touch the charger and battery for any
length of time during charging.

Use and store the battery and battery charger
in a secure location away from children.

■ Doing so may result in burns.

■ Not doing so may cause electric shock or injury.

Do not use a charger or battery that has beendamaged.

If the battery leaks liquid or generates an abnormal odor, immediately move it to a safe placefor disposal.

Do not touch any of the internal componentsof the charger.
■ Doing so may cause electric shock or a burn.

If any abnormalities such as smoke or discoloration are noted with either the charger or the battery, remove the battery from the transmitter or
charger and disconnect the power cord plug anddo not use the charger.
■ Continued use may cause ﬁre, combustion, generationof heat, or rupture.

Do not subject the batteries to impact.
■ Doing so may cause fire, combustion, generation ofheat, rupture, or liquid leakage.

■ Not doing so may cause combustion.

If the battery liquid gets on your skin or clothing, immediately ﬂush the area with tap water orother clean water.
■ Consult a doctor. The liquid can cause skin damage.

After the speciﬁed charging time has elapsed,
end charging and disconnect the charger from thereceptacle.
When recycling or disposing of the battery, isolate the terminals by covering them with tape.
■ Short circuit of the terminals may cause combustion,
generation of heat or rupture.

CAUTION

Do not use the battery with devices other thanthe corresponding transmitter.
Do not place heavy objects on top of the battery or charger. Also, do not place the battery or
charger in any location where it may fall.
■ Doing so may cause damage or injury.

Do not store or use the battery and charger
where it is dusty or humid.
■ Insert the power cord plug into the receptacle only after eliminating the dust.

After the transmitter has been used for a longtime, the battery may become hot. Immediately
remove it from the transmitter.

■ Not doing so may cause a burn.

Do not charge the battery in extreme temperatures.
■ Doing so will degrade the battery performance. An ambient temperature of 10℃ to 30℃ (50 ℉ to 86 ℉ ) is
ideal for charging.

Unplug the charger when not in use.
Do not bend or pull the cord unreasonably anddo not place heavy objects on the cord.
■ The power cord may be damaged and cause combustion, generation of heat, or electric shock.

＜ Introduction ＞ 7

SD Card (Commercial Product) Handling Precautions*Read the instruction manual supplied with the SD card for details.

WARNING

Never disassemble or modify the SD card.
Do not bend, drop, scratch or place heavy objects on the SD card.
If smoke or an abnormal odor emanates from thecard, immediately turn oﬀ the transmitter power.

Do not use the SD card where it may be exposed to water, chemicals, oil, or other ﬂuids.
■ Doing so may cause a ﬁre or electric shock by short circuiting.

CAUTION

Since the SD card is an electronic device, be
careful of static electricity.

Do not insert foreign matter into the transmitter card slot.

■ Static electricity may cause erroneous operation orother trouble.

■ Doing so may cause erroneous operation.

Do not use the SD card near radio and television sets, audio equipment, motors and otherequipment that generates noise.

Do not expose the card to shock and vibrationand do not remove the card from the card slot
while data is being written or read.
■ The data may be damaged or lost.

■ Doing so may cause erroneous operation.

● Recorded data

Do not store the SD card in the following places:

The data recorded on the SD card cannot
be compensated regardless of the contents
or cause of the trouble or obstruction.
Futaba does not perform data restoration or
recovery work.

・Where the humidity is high・Where the temperature diﬀerence is severe
・Where it is very dusty
・Where the card will be exposed to shock and vibration
・Near speakers and other magnetic devices

Storage and Disposal Precautions
WARNING

Keep wireless equipment, batteries, aircraft,
etc. away from children.
CAUTION

Do not store wireless devices in the following
places:・Where it is extremely hot (40℃ [104 ℉ ] or higher) or
cold (-10℃ [14 ℉ ] or lower)
・Where the equipment will be exposed to direct sunlight・Where the humidity is high・Where vibration is prevalent・Where it is very dusty
・Where the device may be exposed to steam and heat

When the device will not be used for a longtime, remove the batteries from the transmitterand aircraft and store them in a dry place where
the temperature is between 0℃ and 30℃ [32 ℉
and 86 ℉ ].
■ Leaving batteries inside your model and radio when
they are not being used for long periods will result inbattery deterioration, liquid leakage and other damage.

Other Precautions
CAUTION

Do not directly expose plastic parts to fuel, oil,exhaust gas, etc.

Always use genuine Futaba products such astransmitter, receiver, servo, ESC, battery, etc.

■ If left in such an environment, the plastic may be damaged.

■ Futaba is not responsible for damage sustained by
combination with parts other than Futaba Genuine
Parts. Use the parts speciﬁed in the instruction manualand catalog.

■ Since the metal parts of the case may corrode, always
keep them clean.

8 ＜ Introduction ＞

ŦƒƑƗƈƑƗƖŃƄƑƇŃŷƈƆƋƑƌƆƄƏŃŶƓƈƆƌƲƆƄƗƌƒƑƖ
Your FX-36 includes the following components:

Speci¿cations and ratings are subject to change without notice.

• FX-36 transmitter• R7008SB Receiver• 6.0V NiMH battery 2500mAh and charging lead
• Switch harness• 2 stick extensions M4 for use in tray
• Aluminium case
• Mini driver• Swing arm stopper and set screw*The set contents depend on the type of set.

ŷƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕŃũŻŐŖřŃ
(2-stick, 18-channel, FASSTest-2.4GHz system)
Transmitting frequency: 2.4GHz band
System: FASSTest18CH, FASSTest12CH, FASST MULT, FASST 7CH, T-FHSS, S-FHSS, switchable
Power requirement: 6.0V-7.4V battery
Frequency band: 2.4GHz
RF power output : 100mW EIRPŵƈƆƈƌƙƈƕŃŵŚœœśŶť
(FASSTest-2.4GHz system, Dual Antenna Diversity, S.BUS/S.BUS2 system)
Power requirement: 3.7V-7.4V battery or regulated output from ESC, etc. (*1)
Size: 0.98 x 1.86 x 0.56 in. (24.9 x 47.3 x 14.3 mm)
Weight: 0.38 oz. (10.9g)
Frequency band: 2.4GHz
RF power output: 25mW EIRP(*1) When using ESCs make sure that the regulated output capacity meets your usage application.

Note: The battery in the FX-36 transmitter does not arrive already attachedto the battery connector. Please connect the battery connector before use.

ŶƈƏƉŃƑƈƘƗƕƄƏŃƖƗƌƆƎ
Throttle stick warning
Ratchet type
（General transmitter）

The throttle stick doesn't
return neutrally.

Self neutral type（FX-36）

The throttle stick
returns neutrally by aspring.

WARNINGYou cannot use the self-neutral throttle stick for R/C airplanes, helicopters, and certain multi-copters.
Allowing the engine/motor to reach middle speed via automatic throttle stick return is very dangerous.
If using the FX-36 for R/C airplanes and helicopters, you must change the throttle stick to the ratchet type.

＜ Before Use ＞ 9ŤƆƆƈƖƖƒƕƌƈƖ
Optional Parts

The following additional accessories are available from your dealer.
Refer to a Futaba catalog for more information:

 For longer Àight time there are 2S/iFe or 2S /iPo batteries available. Pay attention to charge them withthe correct charging method and adjust the low voltage alert according to the battery type.
 Trainer cord - the optional training cord may be used to help a beginning pilot learn to fly easily byplacing the instructor on a separate transmitter. 1ote that the FX-36 transmitter may be connected toanother FX-36 system as well as to any other models of Futaba transmitters. The FX-36 transmitter uses
one of the three cord plug types according to the transmitter connected.
 Servos - there are various kinds of servos. Please choose the Futaba servos that best suit your model andpurpose. If you utilize an S.%8S system you should choose an S.%8S servo. An analog servo cannot be
used if FASSTest2CH mode is used.
 Telemetry sensor - please purchase an optional sensor in order to utilize bidirectional communication
system and to acquire the information from a model high up in the sky.
>Temperature sensor : S%S-T/T(@ >Altitude sensor : S%S-/2A@ >RPM sensor magnet type : S%SRM@ >RPM sensor optical type : S%S-R2@ >RPM sensor brushless motor type : S%S-R%@ >GPSsensor : S%S-/2G@ >9oltage sensor : S%S-9@ >S.%8S servo sensor : S%S-S@ >Current sensor :S%S-C@ <-harnesses servo extensions hubetc - Genuine Futaba extensions and <-harnesses including a heavyduty version with heavier wire are available to aid in your larger model and other installations.
 Gyros - a variety of genuine Futaba gyros is available for your aircraft or helicopter needs.
 Governor - for helicopter use. Automatically adjusts throttle servo position to maintain a constant head
speed regardless of blade pitch load weather etc.
 Receivers - various models of Futaba receivers may be purchased for use in other models. Receivers for
FASSTest and FASST T-FHSS S-FHSS types are available.
 S%D-2 S.%8S decoder -The S%D-2 is a converter for using conventional servos other than an S.%8S
servo with the S.%8S/S.%8S2 system. The S%D-2 connects to the receiver output of an S.%8S/S.%8S2
system and eight servos can be used. S%D-2 can change the output CH by selecting from  groups using
a rotary switch. S%D-2 can use (XT battery for servos .
 Transmitter tray P-TT and neck strap P-TT/1SF
 Different switches 2 stick switches: momentary 2-position or 3- position

10 ＜ Before Use ＞

ŷƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕŃƆƒƑƗƕƒƏƖ

● Monitor LED● Antenna● Dial LD. RD● Switch● Switch● Rotary trim
T5

● Rotary trim
T6

● Linear slider● Stick● Stick
ŭŖ

ŭŕ
ŭŗ

ŭŔ

● Rotary
trim
T1-T4

● Power
Switch● H/E Button(Home/Exit)● U/M Button（User menu/Servo monitor）● Color LCD display Touch Panel

The panel displays shown in this manual may vary from your own,
depending upon your model type. Panel displays may also vary as aresult of version upgrades or other changes.
＜ Before Use ＞ 11

ŷƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕŊƖŃƄƑƗƈƑƑƄ

As with all radio frequency transmissions the strongest area of signal transmission is from the sidesof the transmitter s antenna. As such the antenna should not be pointed directly at the model. If yourÀying style creates this situation easily move the antenna to correct this situation.

If you fly with yourtransmitter facing
the model at theangle shown in theillustration, bend theantenna 90 degrees.

Low power

High power

High power

Do not fly yourmodel with theantenna's tip
pointing in its
direction.

ŵƒƗƄƗƌƑƊŃƄƑƗƈƑƑƄ

The antenna can be rotated  degrees and angles
 degrees. Forcing the antenna further than thiscan damage it. The antenna is not removable.

CAUTION
Please do not grasp the transmitter's
antenna during ﬂight.
■ Doing so may degrade the quality of the RFtransmission to the model.

Do not carry the transmitter by theantenna.

90°■ The antenna wire may break, making
operation impossible.

Do not pull the antenna forcefully.
■ The antenna wire may break, making
operation impossible.

90°

12 ＜ Before Use ＞

ŶƚƌƗƆƋŃŋŶŤŐŶūŌŃ
SH : 3 positions; Alternate;

SA : 3 positions; Alternate;

Short lever

Short lever

SB : 3 positions; Alternate;

SG : 3 positions; Alternate;
Short lever

Short lever

SE : 2 positions; Alternate;Long lever

SD : 3 positions; Alternate;Long lever*Self retum

2 positions

3 positions

Alternate

Momentary(Optional)＜ Before Use ＞ 13

ŹƒƏƘƐƈ
ůŧŃŋůƈƉƗŌŏŃŵŧŃŋŵƌƊƋƗŌŝLDRD

The volume /D and RD knobs allow
analog input.
*The FX-36 transmitter beeps when the volume
knob reaches the center position.
*<ou can use each setting screen of the mixing
functions to select volumes and define thedirection of movement.

ůƌƑƈaƕŃŶƏƌƇƈƕ
ůŶŃŋůƈƉƗŌŏŃŵŶŃŋŵƌƊƋƗŌŝ
The /inear Slider /S and RS offer
analog input.
*The FX-36 transmitter beeps when the levercomes to the center.

LS

14 ＜ Before Use ＞

RS*<ou can select a slide lever and set the
movement direction on the setting screen of
mixing functions.

ŵƒƗƄƕƜŃŷƕƌƐƖŃŷŔŐŷř
This transmitter is equipped with 6 rotary trims.
In addition when the trim position returns tothe center the tone will change. <ou can always
monitor trim positions by referencing the /CD
screen.

T6*<ou can select the trim step amount and the display unit
on the home screen on the T-T6 setting screen within thelinkage menu.
1ote: The trim positions you have set will be stored in the
non-volatile memory and will remain there.

T5

The upper rotary trimmers T and T6 offer
analog input.

T4

T3

T2

T1

*<ou can select a slide lever and set the movement direction
on the setting screen of mixing functions.

ŵƒƗƄƕƜŃƗƕƌƐŃƒƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑƄƏŃƈƛƄƐƓƏƈ*Example Stick Mode2◆When the airplane goes up while theelevator stick is neutral.

◆When the airplane dives while theelevator stick is neutral.

◆Elevator trim to up◆Elevator trim to down
Elevator Neutral

Elevator Neutral

Elevator Down

Elevator Up◆Adjust so that the airplane ﬂies level.

＜ Before Use ＞ 15

ŬƑƖƗƄƏƏƌƑƊŒƕƈƐƒƙƌƑƊŃƗƋƈŃƅƄƗƗƈƕƜ
ŬƑƖƗƄƏƏƌƑƊŒƕƈƐƒƙƌƑƊŃƗƋƈŃŵƈƄƕŃƆƄƖƈ

① "OPEN" of a slider is pushed.

② It slides in the directionof an arrow.

Slider*When a slider is raised, it is the structure which
an internal stopper releases

Stopper

Release Release

Release* When shutting a case, a slider is lowered
and a stopper is locked.
Lock

Lock

Lock

moved in③ A rear case is removed
the direction of an arrow.

* When shutting a case, it
attaches from a lower pawl.

16 ＜ Before Use ＞

Rear caseŷƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕŃťƄƗƗƈƕƜ
ŬƑƖƗƄƏƏƌƑƊŒƕƈƐƒƙƌƑƊŃƗƋƈŃťƄƗƗƈƕƜ
ŬƑƖƗƄƏƏƄƗƌƒƑŃƄƑƇŃƕƈƐƒƙƄƏŃƒƉŃƗƋƈŃ
ƗƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕŃƅƄƗƗƈƕƜ
Attachment of the battery

Battery removal

1. Open the rear case.

Note: If you remove the battery while thepower is on, the data you have set will not
be saved.
1. Open the rear case.
. 'LscRnnect the Eatter\ cRnnectRr.
. 7ZR EanGs are rePRYeG anG the rePRYe thebattery.
. &ORse the rear case cRPpOeteOy.

WARNINGBe careful not to drop the battery.

Band
Connector

Never disconnect the battery connector fromthe FX-36 transmitter after turning off thepower until the screen is completely blank andthe transmitter has shut down completely.
* Internal devices such as memories may be damaged.
* If there is any problem, the message "Backup Error"
will be shown the next time when you turn on the
power of the transmitter. Do not use the transmitter
as it is. Send it to the Futaba service center.

ŦƋƄƕƊƌƑƊŃƗƋƈŃƌƑƆƏƘƇƈƇŃƅƄƗƗƈƕƜŝ
HT6F1800B

Battery
6.0V- 7.4V battery

Charge the transmitter battery before using it for
the first time. To do this insert the transmittercharging lead into the charging socket of a 1iMH
charger correctly then connect the other end of thecharging lead to the charging jack on the left side of
FX-36 see page 2 . Start charging as describedin the manual of your charger. The transmitter must
be switched off during charging.
Note:
The charger must be able to charge 5-cell NiMH
rechargeable batteries. The charging current
must be limited to 1.5 A. Please refer to the user
manual of the charger.

. $ Eatter\ Ls À[eG XsLnJ tZR EanGs.
. &Rnnect the Eatter\ cRnnectRr.
. &ORse the rear case cRPpOeteO\.

＜ Before Use ＞ 17

ūƒƚŃƗƒŃƗƘƕƑŃƗƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕŃƓƒƚƈƕŃŲűŒŲũũŃ

:hen turning on the power the FX-36 transmitter will begin emitting RF automatically after it
con¿rms the surrounding RF conditions. The status of the transmitter is displayed by /(D at the upper
part of the front of a FX-36.
*If THR stick is high a :AR1I1G screen will appear. Another warning will appear if a power
supply is attached. In Multicopter mode the THR position alarm will not appear.

ųƒƚƈƕŃŲű

ųƒƚƈƕŃŲũũ

Throttle Stick Low
Power Switch

Long PushŬƉŃƗƋƈŃŅŷƋƕŃƓƒƖƌƗƌƒƑŅŃƄƏƄƕƐŃƇƌƖƓƏƄƜƖ
*If the throttle stick is in the high position when the
power is turned 21

Warning alarm

Power Switch

Long Push:hen the alarm activates lower the throttle stick
before turning the receiver power 21.
*If the power is turned 21 when the idle-up air brake
etc. switches are 21 the above warning will display.
(nsure the relevant switches are turned 2FF.

Tap this to stop the alarmand RF signal. Only panel
screen operation is active, thetransmitter will not link to any
receiver.

If the power switches are turned oﬀ in the opposite order the model may unexpectedly run out of control andcause a very dangerous situation.

ŷƘƕƑƌƑƊŃƒƑŃƗƋƈŃƓƒƚƈƕŃƖƚƌƗƆƋƈƖ
1. Turn on the transmitter power switch.
2. Turn on the receiver or speed control power switch.

ONON

18 ＜ Before Use ＞

ŷƘƕƑƌƑƊŃƒȭŃƗƋƈŃƓƒƚƈƕŃƖƚƌƗƆƋƈƖ
Always be sure the motor/engine is stopped.
1. Turn oﬀ the receiver or speed control power switch.
2. Then turn oﬀ the transmitter power switch.

OFF

OFF

ŷƒƘƆƋŃųƄƑƈƏ

Tapping the settings buttons foreach value on the settings screen
will cause value input buttons toappear at the top of the panel.

Tap the panel with your finger to enter
data.
*Plastic ¿lm is attached to the Touch Panel. Pleasebe careful so that you don t scratch the Touch Panelwith anything hard such as a metal object. Don t
push the Touch Panel with excessive force or drop
anything on the panel.
*Although you may ¿nd some air bubbles under theplastic panel due to environmental changes suchas temperature it is not a defect and will cause no
problems.
*Color /(D is made from many pixels. Somepixels hold lighting. Moreover some pixels go out.
And a screen may flicker. Such condition is thecharacteristics of color /(D. It is not failure.

Pressing and holding a value will
return it to its default setting.
Value input buttons display at the
top of the panel.

Large change
in value

Small change
in value

Large change
in valueūŒŨŃŋūƒƐƈŒŨƛƌƗŌŃƄƑƇŃŸŒŰŃŋŸƖƈƕŃƐƈƑƘŒŶƈƕƙƒŃƐƒƑƌƗƒƕŌ
H/E

H/E Button

U/M Button

Press

Return to the previous
screenPress and hold

Return to the home screen

Press from HOME
screen.

To Telemetry display

Press and hold fromHOME screen.

Panel lock / Lock release

U/M
Press

To user menu display

Press and holdTo servo monitor display＜ Before Use ＞ 19ųƄƑƈƏŃƏƒƆƎ

Temporarily activating this function makes it impossible to change data by mistakenly touching keys
during Àight.

How to lock
1. 7he hRPe screen Ls GLspOayeG.
. 3ress the +( bXttRn IRr abRXt 1 secRnG.
.ey ParN Ls GLspOayeG anG the Neys
GLsabOeG.

ŃůƒƆƎŃŧƌƖƓƏƄƜ

Panel lock

H/E Press and holdHow to unlock
1. 3ress the +( bXttRn IRr abRXt 1 secRnGanG the paneO ZLOO then becRPe XnORcNeG.

CAUTIONThe FX-36's touch screen is very sensitive. To
avoid accidentally activating it during a flight, it
is suggested that it be locked. Due to the touch
screen's sensitivity, allowing it to be touchedduring flight by a neck strap hook, servo extension,or even your hand could be dangerous. Please use
the Touch Panel lock for added safety during flight.

UnlockH/E Press and holdŵũŃƒȭŃƐƒƇƈ

Model operation is not possible but panel operation without RF signal transmission is allowed.
Reduces battery power consumption during set-up.

"RF oﬀ" Model
operation is notpossible, but only
panel operation is.
U/M
Press and20 ＜ Before Use ＞

Power ON

Restart the power
to transmit RF
signals.

ŰƒƑƌƗƒƕŃůŨŧŃƇƌƖƓƏƄƜ

The status of the transmitter is displayed by /(D at the upper part of the front of a FX-36.

)$667est PRGe ń /LJht %OXe OLJht)$667 PRGe ń *reen OLJht
7)+666)+66 PRGe ń <eOORZJreen OLJht
5)O)) ń 9LROet OLJht
6tartLnJ ń 5eG OLJht
7raLner 6tXGent ń %OXe OLJht
5anJe checN PRGe ń 6ORZ bOLnNLnJ
5eceLYer OLnN PRGe ń )ast bOLnNLnJŶƗƌƆƎŃƆƒƑƗƕƒƏ*Example Stick Mode2

5ROOD[LV

3LWFKD[LV(OHYDWRU6WLFN$LOHURQVWLFN<DZD[LV(QJLQHPRWRU
3RZHU

7KURWWOHVWLFN

5XGGHUVWLFN＜ Before Use ＞ 21

ŶƗƌƆƎŃƆƒƑƗƕƒƏŃŝŃŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŃŋŪƏƌƇƈƕŌŃŨƛƄƐƓƏƈ*Example Stick Mode2

A general model example. (There is also a diﬀerent operational model.)Pitch Axis Control

Roll Axis Control
Nose Up
Right roll
The right aileronis up.

The left aileronis down.

Elevator stick

Aileron stickElevator isUPup.
(moved to the bottom)

To the right
Level ﬂight
Level ﬂight

NeutralNeutralLeft roll

The right
aileron is
down.

The left aileronis up.

Elevator is
down.

Elevator stick

Aileron stick
To the left

Nose Down

DOWN(moved to the top)

Yaw Axis Control

Throttle Control

High throttle
Nose Right

Throttle stick

Rudder stick

HIGHT

To the rightA rudder isright.

(moved to the top)

MiddleThrottle stick
NeutralStraight

MIDDLEA rudder isleft.

(neutral)

Low throttle

Nose Left

Rudder stick
To the leftThrottle stick
LOW(moved to the bottom)

22 ＜ Before Use ＞

ŶƗƌƆƎŃƆƒƑƗƕƒƏŃŝŃūƈƏƌƆƒƓƗƈƕŃŨƛƄƐƓƏƈ*Example Stick Mode2

A general model example. (There is also a diﬀerent operational model.)Pitch Axis Control

Roll Axis Control

Right roll

Nose Up

Elevator stick

Aileron stickUP

To the right(moved to the bottom)

Level ﬂight
Level ﬂight
NeutralNeutralAileron stickElevator stick

Left roll

Nose Down

To the left

Nose Right

DOWN(moved to the top)

Yaw Axis Control

Throttle /Pitch Control

Rudder stickThrottle stick
Rise
HIGHT

To the right

Pitch UpHigh

(moved to the top)

Hovering
Throttle stick
NeutralMIDDLE
MiddleStraight(neutral)

Descent
Pitch Down

Rudder stick
Nose Left

Throttle stick

To the left
Slow

SLOW
(moved to the bottom)＜ Before Use ＞ 23

ŶƗƌƆƎŃƆƒƑƗƕƒƏŃŝŃŰƘƏƗƌƆƒƓƗƈƕŃŨƛƄƐƓƏƈ*Example Stick Mode2

A general model example. (There is also a diﬀerent operational model.)Pitch Axis Control

Roll Axis Control
Right roll

Nose Up

Right slide

Elevator stick

Aileron stick

Hovering
Level ﬂight

UP

Back slide

To the right(moved to the bottom)

Hovering
Level ﬂight
NeutralNeutralLeft roll
Nose Down
Left slide
Aileron stick

Front slide

Elevator stick
DOWN

To the left

(moved to the top)

Throttle Control

Yaw Axis Control
Nose Right

Rudder stickThrottle stick
Rise
HIGH

To the right(moved to the top)

Hovering

Hovering
Level ﬂight

Throttle stick
NeutralMIDDLE(neutral)

Descent

Throttle stick

Rudder stick
Nose Left

24 ＜ Before Use ＞

To the left

Stop

SLOW
(moved to the bottom)

ŶƗƌƆƎŃŤƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗŃ
ŤƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗŃƒƉŃƗƋƈŃƖƗƌƆƎŃƏƈƙƈƕŃ
ƏƈƑƊƗƋ◆ )Rr better erJRnRPLcs Ln trays the set
cRntaLns  stLcN e[tensLRns ZhLch can be
XseG LnsteaG RI /eYer heaGs $.

<ou can adjust the length of stick levers as you
like. It is recommended to adjust the length of the
sticks in line with your hand size.
•Stick Tension (J4)
(Mode 1/2)

Lever headA

Lever headB

1. +ROG the OeYer heaG % anG tXrn the OeYer
heaG $ cRXntercORcNZLse. 7he ORcN ZLOO be
reOeaseG.
. 7Xrn the OeYerheaG $ cORcNZLse as yRX hROG
the OeYerheaG % aIter pOacLnJ Lt as yRX OLNe.

•Stick Tension (J1)
(Mode 1/2)

•Stick Tension (J2)
(Mode 2)

•Stick Tension (J3)
(Mode 1)ŤƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗŃƒƉŃƖƗƌƆƎŃƏƈƙƈƕŃ
ƗƈƑƖƌƒƑ
You can adjust how quickly the
stick returns to neutral.

1.PP he[aJRnaO Zrench

The tension of the self-return type stick lever canbe adjusted.

Turn screw counter-clockwise.
Turn screw clockwise.

1. )Lrst rePRYe the rear case Rn the bRttRP RI
the transPLtter. 1e[t XnpOXJ the battery ZLreanG rePRYe the battery IrRP the transPLtter.
. 8se a 1.PP he[aJRnaO Zrench tR aGMXst
the sprLnJ strenJth as yRX preIer by tXrnLnJ
the aGMXstLnJ screZ RI the stLcN yRX Zant tR
aGMXst.
*Turning the screw clockwise increases the tension.

&$87,O1 /RRsenLnJ the screZ tRR PXch
can LnterIere ZLth the LnternaO stLcN RperatLRn.

Stick tension minimum
Stick tension maximum

. $t the enG RI aGMXstPent reLnstaOO thebattery anG rear case.

＜ Before Use ＞ 25

ŤƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗŃƒƉŃƗƋƈŃƖƗƌƆƎŃƏƈƙƈƕŃ
ƄƑƊƏƈ<ou can make fine adjustments to the angle ofa stick lever either inwards or outwards from thecenter stick position.

ŷƋƕƒƘƊƋŃƋƒƏƏƒƚŃƖƗƌƆƎŃƏƈƙƈƕ

:hen the optional stick switch is connectedto the inside accessories connector SI - S-  theswitch SI - S- becomes usable.

1.PP he[aJRnaO Zrench

Cable inlet
thrRXJh the
hRllRZ sticN
leYer

Stick
Switch*2ption not included

SJ

SI

To inside accessories
connector SJ-SI

8se the attached .mm hexagonal wrench
to turn the screw clockwise to adjust the stickoutwards or counter-clockwise to tilt it inward.
1ote: %e careful not to turn the screw too far
counterclockwise as it could fall out.

26 ＜ Before Use ＞

Hardware select of each functionŤƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗŃƒƉŃŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃŶƗƌƆƎŃŋŵƄƗƆƋƈƗŃŶƜƖƗƈƐŌ
<ou can choose either airplane ratchet system or helicopter-touch.

Mode1/3

Mode2/4
Modi¿cation to ratchet system

Included in set
Swing arm stopper
Set screw:hen modifying the throttle stick from selfneutral system factory installation to ratchetsystem use the accessory parts to change thecorresponding switch to the mode Mode  orMode 2 used.
>Modi¿cation@
1. 7Xrn RII the pRZer tR the transPitter.
. Open the rear case anG rePRYe the battery.
6ee >,nstallinJrePRYinJ the 5ear case@.
. 8se the accessRry 1.PP he[aJRnal ZrenchtR rePRYe the tensiRn aGMXstinJ screZ.
*This screw is used only when returning to the self-neutral
system. Save it.

. )asten the accessRry sZinJ arP stRpper Zith
the set screZ as shRZn in the siGe GiaJraP.
7his Irees the thrRttle sticN.

Swing arm*/ock the stick at the low side or high side by some method
so that the stick swing arm does not rise when installing the
stopper.
*Insert the stopper so that the swing arm is not returned by
the spring. Align the notch of the stopper to the spring.

1e[t aGMXst it tR the tensiRn yRX preIer.

＜ Before Use ＞ 27

ŤƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗŃƒƉŃŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃŶƗƌƆƎŃŋŵƄƗƆƋƈƗŃŶƜƖƗƈƐŌ
<ou can choose either airplane ratchet system or helicopter-touch.

*This transmitter has two ratchet
plates one for airplane and theother one for helicopter. If youtighten both screws you won t
be able to achieve the adjustmentthat you need because of theoverlap of those two adjustments.

Ɣ5HWDLQLQJ)RUFH - 0RGHƔ5HWDLQLQJ)RUFH -
0RGH

*If you want to change the settingfrom airplane to helicopter orfrom helicopter to airplane turn the ratchet screw clockwise
until the throttle stick moves
freely. Then turn the screw for
the helicopter until you get thetension you like.

Airplane*In the Mode /3 arrangement of a screw is opposite.

>Adjustment of tension@
1. )irst rePRYe the rear case Rn the bRttRP RI thetransPitter. 1e[t XnplXJ the battery Zire anG
rePRYe the battery IrRP the transPitter.
. 8se the 1.PP he[aJRnal Zrench tR tXrn the
aGMXstPent screZ anG set it as yRX preIer. 7XrninJ
the screZ clRcNZise increases the tensiRn.
)Rr airplanes $GMXst the screZ Rn the leIt.
)Rr helicRpters $GMXst the screZ Rn the riJht.
,n chanJinJ the settinJ IrRP airplane tR helicRpter Rrheli tR airplane 
1. 7Xrn the screZ cRXnterclRcNZise Xntil the thrRttle
sticN PRYes Ireely anG tXrn the screZ clRcNZise tR
aGMXst it tR the tensiRn yRX preIer.

28 ＜ Before Use ＞

HelicopterŦƒƑƑƈƆƗƒƕŒųƏƘƊ

① Side cover is opened.

② Side cover is stuﬀed
into inside.

TrainerConnector

S.BUS (S.I/F)
ConnectorŷƕƄƌƑƈƕŃƆƒƑƑƈƆƗƒƕ

:hen you use the trainer function connect theoptional trainer cable between the transmitters forteacher and student.
*<ou can set the trainer function on the Trainer Function
screen in the System menu.

ŨƄƕƓƋƒƑƈŃƓƏƘƊ

Connecting a stereo headphone to this plug thespeech information of telemetry can be heard.

WARNING
Do not connect any other chargers
except the special charger to thischarging connector.

EarphonePlug

SD cardSlot

ChargePlugŶőťŸŶŃƆƒƑƑƈƆƗƒƕŃŋŶőŬŒũŌ

:hen using an S.%8S servo and telemetry
sensor connect them both here. 9oltage supply is
included.

ŶŧŃƆƄƕƇŃƖƏƒƗ

The FX-36 transmitter model data can be stored
by using any commonly found SD card. :hen
FX-36 transmitter update software is released thesoftware is updated using an SD card.

ŦƒƑƑƈƆƗƒƕŃƉƒƕŃƅƄƗƗƈƕƜŃƆƋƄƕƊƈƕ

For connecting the enclosed charging cable oran optional /iPo charger only if an optional /iPobattery will be used . Max. charging current .A.
2bserve the notes on the battery and the battery
charger.
＜ Before Use ＞ 29ŶŧŃŦƄƕƇŃŋƖƈƆƘƕƈŃƇƌƊƌƗƄƏŃƐƈƐƒƕƜŃƆƄƕƇŌŃŋƑƒƗŃƌƑƆƏƘƇƈƇŌ
The FX-36 transmitter model data can be stored by using any commonly found SD card. :hen FX36 transmitter update software is released the software is updated using an SD card. The FX-36 iscapable of using SD and SDHC cards SD:32M%-2G% SDHC:4G%-32G% .

ŶŧŃƆƄƕƇŃƕƈƄƇƈƕŒƚƕƌƗƈƕ

Saving model data and update
files released from Futaba into the
SD card you can use those files on
your FX-36 transmitter. (quipment
for reading and writing SD cards isavailable at most electronics stores.

ŶƗƒƕƈƇŃƇƄƗƄ

:hen you have a problem of saving or reading
data after a long period of use please get a new SD
card.
*:e are not responsible for and offer no compensation for
memory card data that fails or is damaged for any reason.
%e sure to keep a backup of all important data stored in yourSD card.

ŬƑƖƈƕƗƌƑƊŒƕƈƐƒƙƌƑƊŃƗƋƈŃŶŧŃƆƄƕƇ

③ When the SD card is pressed in once again,
the card will be released from the card slot
and can be removed.

CAUTIONBe sure to turn off the power tothe transmitter before inserting or
removing the SD card.
Side cover① The side cover isopened.

SD card slot

② Insert the SD card
into the SD card slot.

*Pay attention to the proper
orientation of the SD card, as
shown here.

30 ＜ Before Use ＞

As the SD card is a precision device, do
not use excessive force when inserting.
-:hen an SD card is installed in the FX-36 transmitter a folder called Futaba is created. Folders
called /2G and M2D(/ are created in thisfolder. The M2D(/ folder stores the model data
and the /2G folder stores the telemetry log data.
-The telemetry log data recorded on the SD card
can be converted to CS9 format by the telemeterlog converter released on our home page. :hencopying or moving a log file always select both
.F/I and .F/D ¿le.

ŵƈƆƈƌƙƈƕŃƑƒƐƈƑƆƏƄƗƘƕƈ
%efore using the receiver be sure to read theprecautions listed in the following pages.

ŵƈƆƈƌƙƈƕŃŵŚœœśŶťDANGER
Don't attach a connector as shown in
the preceding illustration.
*It will short-circuit if connected in this way. A
short circuit across the battery terminals may
cause abnormal heating, ﬁre and burns.

WARNING
S.BUS2 connectors
Don't connect an S.BUS servo / gyro
to S.BUS2 connector.

Connector
 through 6: outputs for the channels through 6
/%: outputs of  channels and power.
/S%: outputs of  channels or S.%8S port.
>S.BUS Servo S.BUS *yro @*:hen using /S% as S.%8S you have to set
CH M2D( of the following page to mode % ormode D.
S.%8S2: outputs of S.%8S2 port.
>S.BUS2 Servo S.BUS2 *yro Telemetry Sensor @*:hen using  or more channels use an S.%8S
function or use a second RS% and link
both to your transmitter.
*CG< S.%8S Gyro should 12T beconnected to the S.%8S2 ports on any receiver.

Connector insertion

LED Monitor
This monitor is used to check the CH mode of
the receiver.

Link/Mode Switch
8se the small plastic screw driver that was
included with your receiver.
The /ink/Mode Switch is also used for the CH
mode selection.

＋

Firmly insert the connector in the direction
shown in the ¿gure. Insert the S.%8S2 by turningit  degrees.

DANGER
5HFHLYHU

Do not connect either a switch
or battery in this manner.

−
Extra Voltage Connector
8se this connector when using a voltage
telemetry device to send the battery voltage DCa 9 from the receiver to the transmitter.
<ou will need to purchase the optional(xternal 9oltage input cable CA-R9I1- .
<ou can then make a cable with an extra
connector to the (xternal voltage connector.
＜ Before Use ＞ 31

DANGER
Don't touch wiring.
* There is a danger of receiving an electric shock.

Do not short-circuit the battery
terminals.
* A short circuit across the battery terminals may
cause abnormal heating, ﬁre and burns.

Please double check your polarity( ＋ and − ) when hooking up yourconnectors.
* If ＋ and − of wiring are mistaken, it will damage,ignite and explode.

>How to change the RS% Channel mode.@
1. 3ress anG hRlG GRZn the /inN0RGe bXttRn
Rn the 56% receiYer.
. 7Xrn the receiYer Rn Zhile hRlGinJ GRZn
the /inN0RGe bXttRn. :hen the /('beJins tR blinN JreenreG the bXttRn Pay
be releaseG.
. 7he /(' shRXlG nRZ be blinNinJ reG in Rne
RI the patterns GescribeG by the chart
belRZ.
. (ach press RI the 0RGe/inN bXttRn
aGYances the receiYer tR the ne[t PRGe.
. :hen yRX reach the PRGe that yRX ZishtR Rperate in press anG hRlG the 0RGe
/inN bXttRn IRr PRre than  secRnGs.
. Once lRcNeG intR the cRrrect PRGe the/(' Zill chanJe tR a sRliG cRlRr.
. 3lease cycle the receiYer s pRZer RII anG
bacN Rn aJain aIter chanJinJ the Channel
0RGe.

Don't connect to Extra Voltage before
turning on a receiver power supply.

ŵŚœœśŶť ŦūŃŰƒƇƈ

The RS% receiver is a very versatile
unit. It has  P:M outputs S.%8S and S.%8S2
outputs. Additionally the P:M outputs can bechanged from channels - to channels -6. If
you only desire to use it as an  channel receiver
without S.%8S  it can be used without any
setting changes.
The FX-36 has the ability to link to twoRS% receivers. 2ne of them outputting
channels - and the other outputting channels
-6 gives you 6 P:M channels. Instructions
for this configuration and S.%8S operation
follow.

R7008SB CH MODE TABLE
Receiverconnector

Setting channel
Mode A
1-8CH

Mode B
1-7CH

Mode C
9-16CH

Mode D
9-15CH

1

1

1

9

9

2

2

2

10

10

3

3

3

11

11

4

4

4

12

12

5

5

5

13

13

6

6

6

14

14

7/B

7

7

15

15

8/SB

8

S.BUS

16

S.BUS

Red LED blink

1 time2 times

3 times

4 times

Default

32 ＜ Before Use ＞

ŵƈƆƈƌƙƈƕŊƖŃŤƑƗƈƑƑƄŃŬƑƖƗƄƏƏƄƗƌƒƑ

The RS% has two antennas. In order to maximize signal reception and promote safe modeling
Futaba has adopted a diversity antenna system. This allows the receiver to obtain RF signals on bothantennas and Ày problem-free.
*Must be kept as straight as possible.

Antenna

Coaxial cable
R7008SB Receiver

To obtain the best results of the diversity
function please refer to the following
instructions:
1. 7he tZR antennas PXst be Nept as straiJht
as pRssible. OtherZise it Zill reGXce theeIIectiYe ranJe.
. 7he tZR antennas shRXlG be placeG at 
GeJrees tR each Rther.

Antenna7his is nRt a critical IiJXre bXt the PRst
iPpRrtant thinJ is tR Neep the antennas
aZay IrRP each Rther as PXch as pRssible.
/arJer PRGels can haYe larJe Petal
RbMects that can ZeaNen the 5) siJnal. ,nthis case the antennas shRXlG be placeG
at bRth siGes RI the PRGel. 7hen the best5) siJnal cRnGitiRn is RbtaineG at any ÁyinJ
attitXGe.
. 7he antennas PXst be Nept aZay IrRP
cRnGXctiYe Paterials sXch as Petal
carbRn anG IXel tanN by at least halI an
inch. 7he cRa[ial part RI the antennas GResnRt neeG tR IRllRZ these JXiGelines bXt GR
nRt benG it in a tiJht raGiXs.
. .eep the antennas aZay IrRP the PRtRr
(6C anG Rther nRise sRXrces as PXch as
pRssible.

Antenna*The two antennas should be placed at  degrees to each other.
*The illustration demonstrates how the antenna should be placed.
*Receiver 9ibration and :aterproofing: The receiver contains precision electronic parts. %e sure to avoid vibration
shock and temperature extremes. For protection wrap the receiver in foam rubber or other vibration-absorbing
materials. It is also a good idea to waterproof the receiver by placing it in a plastic bag and securing the open end of the
bag with a rubber band before wrapping it with foam rubber. If you accidentally get moisture or fuel inside the receiver
you may experience intermittent operation or a crash. If in doubt return the receiver to our service center for service.

＜ Before Use ＞ 33

ŰƒƘƑƗƌƑƊŃƗƋƈŃŶƈƕƙƒŃ
Wood screw

2.3-2.6mm nut
washerRubbergrommetBrass eyelet

RubbergrommetBrass eyelet

Servo mount
Servo mount2.3-2.6mm screw(Airplane/Glider)(Helicopter)ŶƄƉƈƗƜŃƓƕƈƆƄƘƗƌƒƑƖŃƚƋƈƑŃ
ƜƒƘŃƌƑƖƗƄƏƏŃƕƈƆƈƌƙƈƕŃƄƑƇŃ
ƖƈƕƙƒƖőWARNING
Connecting connectors
Be sure to insert the connector until it
stops at the deepest point.
How to protect the receiver from vibration
and waterŶƈƕƙƒŃƏƈƄƇŃƚƌƕƈƖŃ

To prevent the servo lead cable from being
broken by vibration during flight provide alittle slack in the cable and fasten it at suitable
points. Periodically check the cable during daily
maintenance.

Wrap the receiver with something
soft such as foam rubber to avoid
vibration. If there is a chance ofgetting wet, put the receiver in awaterproof bag or balloon.
Receiver's antenna
Never cut the receiver's antenna. Do
not bind the receiver's antenna withthe cables for servos.

Margin in the lead wire.

Fasten about 5-10cm
from the servo outlet sothat the lead wire is neatand secure.

ŰƒƘƑƗƌƑƊŃƗƋƈŃƓƒƚƈƕŃƖƚƌƗƆƋŃ

:hen mounting a power switch to an
airframe make a rectangular hole that is a little
larger than the total stroke of the switch sothat you can turn the switch 21/2FF withoutbinding.
Avoid mounting the switch where it can becovered by engine oil and dust. In general it isrecommended to mount the power switch on theside of the fuselage that is opposite the mufÀer.

Attached screwLess than 5 mm of
mounting plate

Switch cover

Switch34 ＜ Before Use ＞

Locate the receiver's antenna as far as
possible from metals or carbon fiber
components such as frames, cables,etc.
*Cutting or binding the receiver's antenna will
reduce the radio reception sensitivity and range,
and may cause a crash.

Servo throw
Adjust your system so that pushrods
will not bind or sag when operating
the servos to the full extent.
*If excessive force is continuously applied to a servo, the servo could be damaged due to force on
the gear train and/or power consumption causing
rapid battery drain.

Mounting servos
Use a vibration-proof rubber (such as
rubber grommet) under a servo when
mounting the servo on a servo mount.
And be sure that the servo cases do
not touch directly to the metal parts
such as servo mount.
*If the servo case contacts the airframe directly,
vibration will travel to and possibly damage theservo.

ŶőťŸŶŒŶőťŸŶŕŃŬƑƖƗƄƏƏƄƗƌƒƑ

This set uses the S.%8S/S.%8S2 system. The wiring is as simpli¿ed and clean mounting as possible
even with models that use a large number of servos. In addition the wings can be quickly installed to thefuselage without any erroneous wiring by the use of only one simple wire even when there are a large
number of servos used.
Ɣ:hen using S.%8S/S.%8S2 special settings and mixes in your transmitter may be unnecessary.
ƔThe S.%8S/S.%8S2 servos memorize the number of channels themselves. settable with the FX-36
ƔThe S.%8S/S.%8S2 system and conventional system receiver conventional CH used can be mixed.

S.BUS

Glider usage example
Receiver: R7008SB
Servo: S3174SV×9 ( Optional )HUB×4 ( Optional )Throttle servo: BLS173SV ( Optional )Battery: FR2F1800 ( Optional )S.BUS Aerobatic plane usage example

SwitchReceiver: R7008SB
Aileron servo: BLS174SV×2 ( Optional )HUB×3 ( Optional )Rudder Servo: BLS175SV×1 ( Optional )Elevator servo: BLS173SV×2 ( Optional )＜ Before Use ＞ 35

ŶőťŸŶŃźƌƕƌƑƊŃƈƛƄƐƓƏƈ
*When using 8/SB as S.BUS, you must set
the receiver to Mode B or Mode D. See ●S.BUS Servo
R7008SB CH MODE TABLE.
Since the channel number is memorized by the S.BUS itself, any
connector can be used. When the SBD-1, SBD-2 (sold separately)is used, ordinary servos can be used with the S.BUS system.
Receiver*SBD-1 S.BUS Decoders cannot be used by S.BUS2 port.

Optional Parts●6-Terminal box(TB16PP)Six connectors can beinserted%DWWHU\
6%86
3RUW
6%

+XE
‫ق‬$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\‫ك‬

6ZLWFK

7HUPLQDOER[
6%86([WHQVLRQ&DEOH

6ZLWFK+XE+XE●Hub（Another power
supply）
Used when using aseparate power supply
battery.
Orange%DWWHU\●Hub
Three connectors can beinserted.
Green

6%866HUYR

6%866HUYR●When separate power supply used

When a large number of servos are used or when highcurrent servos are used, the servos can be driven by aseparate power supply by using a separate Power
Supply 3-way hub with orange connector.

WARNING
Power supply

Please make sure that you use a battery that can deliver enough capacity forthe number and kind of servos used. Alkaline batteries cannot be used.

S.BUS Gyro CGY750
Connection example&+(OHYDWRU

6ZLWFK*When using 8/SB as S.BUS, youmust set the receiver to Mode B
or Mode D. See R7008SB CH
MODE TABLE.

Receiver&+$LOHURQ%DWWHU\

6%863RUW
6%

&+
7KURWWOH&+
5XGGHU&*<
*\UR
&+
3LWFK

36 ＜ Before Use ＞

ŶőťŸŶŕŃŶƜƖƗƈƐ

:hen using the S.%8S2 port an impressive array of telemetry sensors may be utilized.

S.BUS2 TABLE
Receiver port

S.BUS Servo
S.BUS Gyro

S.BUS2 Servo
S.BUS2 Gyro

Telemetry sensor

S.BUS

○

○

×

S.BUS2

× （※）

○

○

（※）Don't connect S.BUS Servo, S.BUS
Gyro to S.BUS2 connector.

S.BUS servos and gyros and S.BUS2 servos and gyros must be used in thecorrect receiver ports. Please refer to the instruction manual to make sure
you connect to the correct one.

&+0RGHLVVHWWR0RGH%>'@

6%86
3RUW
6%
6%86
3RUW

+XE

+XE

6%866HUYR
6%86VHUYR&RQQHFWLRQLVSRVVLEOH
6%86J\UR&RQQHFWLRQLVSRVVLEOH
7HOHPHWU\VHQVRU&RQQHFWLRQLVLPSRVVLEOH

+XE

+XE

6%866HUYR

7HOHPHWU\
6HQVRU

6%86VHUYR&RQQHFWLRQLVLPSRVVLEOH

6%86
*<52
ٔ

5XGGHU6HUYR＜ Before Use ＞ 37

ŶőťŸŶŒŶőťŸŶŕŃƇƈƙƌƆƈŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ

S.%8S/S.%8S2 servos or a telemetry sensor can be connected directly to the FX-36. Channel setting andother data can be entered for the S.%8S/S.%8S2 servos or sensors.

);

1. CRnnect the 6.%86 GeYice yRX Zant tR set
Zith as shRZn in the ÀJXre.
. 7Xrn Rn the transPitter pRZer.
. Call the setXp screen.
6erYR 6ysteP 0enX → 6.%86 serYR
6ensRr /inNaJe 0enX → 6ensRr
. 3erIRrP settinJ in accRrGance Zith eachscreen.
. 7his sets the channel anG Rther Gata IRr each
6.%86 serYR Rr telePetry GeYice tR be XseG
Zith the 6.%86 GeYice Rr receiYer.

*It is not necessary to carry out multiple battery
connections like a TM=/T4SG.

*:hen connecting many current-consuming
servos please use an additional power supply
hub.
And electric power is supplied to a servo withanother power supply.
+XE‫ق‬$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\‫ك‬
6ZLWFK+XE+XE

6%866%86
GHYLFH
6%866%86VHUYR%DWWHU\

7HOHPHWU\VHQVRUWARNING
Do not disconnect or turn transmitter power OFF
while S.BUS servo and telemetry sensor data is
being saved.
■ S.BUS servo and sensor save data will be lost,
resulting in malfunction.

6%866HUYR●When separate power supply used
When a large number of servos are used orwhen high current servos are used, the servos
can be driven using a separate Power Supply
3-way hub.

WARNING
Do not use the S.I/F (S.BUS servo setup) connector
with anything other than high-voltage-capable
S.BUS servos.
■ Transmitter battery voltage (6.6V) is conveyed
directly.
Us in g a n y t h i n g o t h e r t h an h i g h -v ol tag e capable servos presents the danger that they
will break.

38 ＜ Before Use ＞

Green

+XE
‫ق‬$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\‫ك‬Used when using a separate
power supply battery.

BASIC OPERATION
ūƒƐƈŃƖƆƕƈƈƑ
This is the Home screen and descriptions of its menus. Use your finger to operate the touch
screen.
Battery voltage for receivers

Condition nameBattery Indicator• In FASSTest/T-FHSS mode, it isdisplayed. Receiver voltage
and Ext voltage display• The condition namethat is currently used
is displayed here.

• When the battery voltage
reaches 5.8V(NiMH), the alarm
will beep. Land your aircraft
immediately.

→ (Menu)• ModelTap the button to call Model
Menu screen.

System mode
• System(FASSTest18CH etc.)
mode is displayed here.

The reception of the signal from thereceiver to the transmitter is shown.
• This does not aIIect Áight.

Timer1, Timer2• Timer is displayed here.
Tap the time button to start/stop thetimer. (When the screen is tapped for
1 second, timer is reset to the initialvalue.)RF Indicator
Model Name

Date and Time• The model name thatis currently used isdisplayed here.

User's name→ (Menu)• System• Linkage• Model selectTap the button to call each Menu
screen.

System timer• This shows the accumulated timesince the latest reset. (Each model /Total)(Hour):(Minute):(Second)

Rotary trim (T1 to T6)• Trim position is displayed
here.

WARNINGBe sure to conﬁrm the model name before ﬂying your aircraft.
Check the battery voltage as often as possible and try to charge the battery earlier.
If the battery alarm makes a sound, land your aircraft immediately.
*You can adjust the LCD contrast by the display setting in the system menu.

＜ Basic Operation ＞ 39ŃůƌƑƎŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈŃŋũŻŐŖřŒŵŚœœśŶťŌ
Each transmitter has an individually assigned, unique ID code. In order to start operation, the receivermust be linked with the ID code of the transmitter to which it is being paired. Once the link is made,the ID code is stored in the receiver and no further linking is necessary unless the receiver is to be usedwith another transmitter. When you purchase additional R7008SB receivers, this procedure is necessary;otherwise the receiver will not work.

ůƌƑƎŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
1. Place the transmitter and the receiver close
to each other within half (0.5m) meter.

6.[Link] is tapped. The transmitter will emit achime as it starts the linking process.

Less than 0.5 m

2. Turn on the transmitter.
3. Select [System type] at the Linkage menu
and access the setup screen shown below
by tapping the screen.

7. When the transmitter starts to chime, poweron the receiver. The receiver should link to
the transmitter within about 1 second.

4. When you use two receivers on one model,
you must change from [Single] to [Dual].
*Only two receivers can be used. In"Dual", two setting items come out. Input,
respectively.
ID of a primary
receiver displays.

ID of a secondary
receiver displays.

In "Link" Mode

Receiver ON
In Dual, a primary receiver (Rx1) islinked first. Next, a secondary (Rx2)
receiver is linked.
5. Battery fail-safe voltage can be changed
from the initial value of 3.8V here.
* Only in FASSTest/T-FHSS Mode.

40 ＜ Basic Operation ＞

8. If linking fails, an error message is displayed.
Bring the transmitter closer to the receiverand repeat the procedure above from Step 2.

9. ACT will be chosen if telemetry is used.
It is INH when not using it.

*Telemetry function cannot be used for the 2ndreceiver. → FASSTest18CH*Telemetry function cannot be used for the dual
receiver. → T-FHSS, FASSTest12CH*You must link one receiver at a time. If both
power supplies to the receivers are switched on
simultaneously, data is received incorrectly by
the transmitter.
*You cannot link three receivers.
*Link is required when a system type ischanged.

10. When a telemetry function is enabled,
the receiving interval (down-link interval)of sensor data can be changed. If a D/
L interval is increased, the response of thesensor data display becomes slower, butstick response will improve.
Initial value: 1.0s
Adjustment range: 0.1s~2.0s*Linking is required whenever a new model is
made.

WARNING
After the linking is done, please cycle
receiver power and check that thereceiver to be linked is really under thecontrol of the transmitter.
Do not perform the linking procedure
with motor's main wire connected orwith the engine operating as it may
result in serious injury.

*If there are many FASSTest (T-FHSS) systems
turned on around your receiver, it might notlink to your transmitter. In this case, even if thereceiver's LED stays solid green, unfortunately
the receiver might have established a link
to one of other transmitters. This is very
dangerous if you do not notice this situation.
In order to avoid the problem, we strongly
recommend you to double check whether
your receiver is really under control by yourtransmitter by giving the stick input and thenchecking the servo response.

ŤƉƗƈƕŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ

*Do not perform the linking operation when
the drive motor is connected or the engine isrunning.
*When you use two receivers, please be sure to
setup a "Rx1" and "Rx2" in the "dual" mode.

After setting, press a H/E button＜ Basic Operation ＞ 41

ŬƉŃƗƋƈŃƕƈƆƈƌƙƈƕŊƖŃƙƒƏƗƄƊƈŃƇƒƈƖŃƑƒƗŃƇƌƖƓƏƄƜŃƒƑŃƗƋƈŃƗƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕŃŃŃŃŃ
◆ When the receiver has the transmitter's ID in memory, a link is established and normal
operation is allowed.
◆ When the transmitter has the receiver's ID in memory, a link is established andtelemetry functions are usable.
The transmitter stores receiver IDs by model; thus, if it does not have a particular
receiver model ID stored in memory or has a different receiver ID stored, telemetryfunctions will be unusable. However, the device is operable as long as the receiver has
the transmitter's ID stored in memory.

Link of model 1

Model 1 →Model 2Model 1: Receiver ID: xxxxxx1

Device is operable if receiver
has transmitter's ID stored inmemoryModel 2: Receiver ID: --------Model 3: Receiver ID: ---------

Link
Tx ID: xxxxxx2

Rx ID: xxxxxx1

Telemetry functions unusable because
Model 2 does not have receiver's ID
stored in memory.
Transmitter switched to Model 2 andlink reestablished

Operable

Model 1: Receiver ID: xxxxxx1

Tx ID: xxxxxx2
storedModel 2: Receiver ID: ---------

Tx ID: xxxxxx2
storedLink

Model 3: Receiver ID: --------Rx ID: xxxxxx1

Telemetry usable

Receiver ID: xxxxxx1
stored for Model 1

Model 1: Receiver ID: xxxxxx1
Model 2: Receiver ID: xxxxxx1
Model 3: Receiver ID: ---------

Because receiver IDs will be stored
in the memory of each transmittermodel, it is unnecessary toreestablish a link once the receiver
ID has been stored in memory fora given model.

Telemetry usable
Rx ID: xxxxxx1

When setting up a new model, before using it, ﬁrst
establish a link with the receiver that will be usedwith it.
42 ＜ Basic Operation ＞

ŵƄƑƊƈŃŷƈƖƗƌƑƊŃżƒƘƕŃŵŒŦŃŶƜƖƗƈƐŃ

It is extremely important to range check your models prior to each Àying session. This enables you to ensurethat everything is functioning as it should and to obtain maximum enjoyment from your time Àying. The FX-36
transmitter incorporates a system that reduces its power output and allows you to perform such a range check.

ŵƄƑƊƈŃƆƋƈƆƎŃƐƒƇƈŃ

1. While pushing "U/M" button.

U/M
Press and2. THR Stick Slow.

3. FX-36 Power ON.
4. Select "Range check" at the System menu.

5. "Start" tap.

During this mode, the RF power output is reduced
so the range test can be performed. In addition, when
this mode is activated the right LED on the front of thetransmitter starts blinking and the transmitter gives users
a warning with a beeping sound.
The "Range check mode" continues for 90 seconds
and after that the power will return to the normal level.
To exit the "Range check mode" before the 90 seconds,press the "H/E" button. NEVER start flying when the"Range check mode" is active.
Should you require additional time to perform a range
check, highlight Restart before your time expires and tap
the screen one time.

ŵƄƑƊƈŃƆƋƈƆƎŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
1. With the "Range check mode" on, walkaway from the model while simultaneously
operating the controls. Have an assistant
stand by the model to confirm that allcontrols are completely and correctly
operational. You should be able to walkapproximately 30-50 paces from the model
without losing control.
2. If everything operates correctly, return tothe model. Set the transmitter in a safe, yetaccessible, location so it will be within reachafter starting the engine or motor. Be certain
the throttle stick is in the low throttle position,then start the engine or motor. Perform
another range check with your assistantholding the aircraft with the engine runningat various speeds. If the servos jitter or move
inadvertently, there may be a problem. We
would strongly suggest you do not Áy until thesource of the difÀculty has been determined.
Look for loose servo connections or binding
pushrods. Also, be certain that the battery
has been fully charged.
Range checking on
low power.

About 100 feet

6. The H/E button is pressed to end a range
check.

WARNING
Do not ﬂy in the range check mode.
*Since the range of the radio waves is short, if themodel is too far from the transmitter, control will
be lost and the model will crash.

Range check mode

＜ Basic Operation ＞ 43

MODEL BASIC SETTING PROCEDURE
ŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŃƅƄƖƌƆŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
ŔőŃŰƒƇƈƏŃƄƇƇƌƗƌƒƑŃƄƑƇŃƆƄƏƏ
Initial setting assigns 1 model to the FX-36 transmitter.
The Model Select function is used to add models and toselect models which are already set.

The data for up to 30 models can be saved to thetransmitter. Data can also be saved to the optional SD
card.

ŏ If the direction of the servo is incorrect, adjust
the direction with the Reverse function of the
Linkage menu.

The currently selected model name is displayed at the
top of the screen. Before Àying and before changing any
settings, always con¿rm the model name.

ŕőŃŰƒƇƈƏŃƗƜƓƈŃƖƈƏƈƆƗƌƒƑŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃ
Select the model type matched to the aircraft with theModel type select function of the Linkage menu. For an
airplane, select the model type from among the 2 types:
airplane and glider. After the wing type is selected thetail type select screen is displayed. Select the tail typematched to the aircraft.
There are 13 wing types and 3 tail types for airplaneand glider.

ŏ Adjust the neutral position and control surface
angle with the linkage, and fine tune themwith the Sub trim and End point functions(angle adjustment). To protect the linkage,a limit position can also be set with the End
point function. The End point function canadjust the amount of up/down and left/rightmovement, limit, and servo speed of eachchannel.

ŖőŃũƘƖƈƏƄƊƈŃƏƌƑƎƄƊƈ
Connect the ailerons, elevators, throttle, rudder, etc.
in accordance with the model's instruction manual. Fora description of the connection method, see the "Servos
connection by model type".
Note: The channel assignment of the FX-36 isdifferent from that of our existing systems. Notethat even for the same "airplane model", when thewing type and tail type are different, the channel
assignment may be different. (The channel assigned
to each function can be checked at the "Function"of the Linkage menu.)

44 ＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞

ŗőŃŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃƆƘƗŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
Throttle cut can be performed with one touch by aswitch without changing the throttle trim position.
Set throttle cut with the Throttle cut function of the
Linkage menu. After activating the throttle cut function
and selecting the switch, adjust the throttle position sothat the carburetor becomes fully closed. For safety, thethrottle cut function operates the throttle stick in the 1/3
or less (slow side) position.

ŚőŃŤƌƕƅƕƄƎƈ
This function is used when an air brake is necessary
when taking off or diving, etc.
The preset elevators and Àaps (camber Àap, brake Àap)offset amount can be activated by a switch.

ŘőŃŬƇƏƈŃƇƒƚƑŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
The idling speed can be lowered with one touch bya switch without changing the throttle trim position.
Perform this setting with the Idle down function of the
Linkage menu. After activating the Idle down function
and selecting the switch, adjust the idle down speed. For
safety, the idle down function acts only when the throttle
stick is slow side.

The offset amount of the aileron, elevator, and flap
servos can be adjusted as needed. Also the speed of theaileron, elevator, and flap servos can be adjusted. (Inside/Out side) A delay can be set for each condition,
and a cut switch which will turn OFF the delay can bechosen. Trim amounts can be ¿ne-tuned by setting a VR.
You can also set the auto mode, which will link Airbraketo a stick, switch, or dial. A separate stick switch or dialcan also be set as the ON/OFF switch.

*While the Throttle cut function is in operation, the Idle downfunction does not work.

śőŃŤƇƇƌƗƌƒƑŃƒƉŃƳƌƊƋƗŃƆƒƑƇƌƗƌƒƑƖ
řőŃŤũŵŃŋŧŒŵŌ
AFR function is used to adjust the throw and operation
curve of the stick, lever, and switch functions for eachflight condition. This is normally used after End point
has de¿ned the maximum throw directions.

The Condition select function automatically allocates
the Condition 1 for each model. Condition 1 is thedefault condition and is the only one active when a newmodel type is de¿ned.
If you want to add Àight conditions, please refer to a
description of the Condition select function.

*The Condition 1 is always on, and remains on until otherconditions are activated by switches.
*When a new condition is added, the model data of theCondition 1 is automatically copied to the new condition.
*You can set the model data of new condition in the switch
ON state. However, if the group mode (Gr) was selected inadvance, the same data will be input at all the conditions.
Select the single mode (Sngl) and adjust only the condition
you want to change. For Group/Single mode switching, referto the description at the back of this manual.
*The Condition delay can be programmed for each channel.
The Condition delay is used to change the servo throwsmoothly when switching conditions.

＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞ 45

ūƈƏƌƆƒƓƗƈƕŃƅƄƖƌƆŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
This section outlines examples of use of the helicopter functions of the FX-36. Adjust the actual values, etc. to match
the fuselage used.

ŔőŃŰƒƇƈƏŃƄƇƇƌƗƌƒƑŃƄƑƇŃƆƄƏƏ

ŖőŃũƏƌƊƋƗŃƆƒƑƇƌƗƌƒƑŃƄƇƇƌƗƌƒƑ

Default setting assigns 1 model to the FX-36. To add
new models or to call a model already set, use the Modelselect function.

The transmitter can install up to eight Àight conditions
per model.

This is convenient when calling a model after
registering the model names in advance. (The data of up
to 30 models can be saved at the transmitter. Data canalso be saved to the optional SD card.)
The currently called model is displayed at the topof the screen. Before flying and before changing any
settings, always con¿rm the model name.

ŕőŃŰƒƇƈƏŃƗƜƓƈŃƄƑƇŃƖƚƄƖƋŃƗƜƓƈŃƖƈƏƈƆƗƌƒƑ
If a different model type is already selected, selecthelicopter with the Model type function of the Linkage
menu, and then select the swash type matched to thehelicopter.

The Condition select function automatically allocates¿ve conditions for helicopter.
(General setting)ŏ Normalŏ Idle up1
ŏ Idle up2
ŏ Idle up3
ŏ HoldNote: Delete conditions you have not set
up and will not use. Otherwise you may
accidentally activate them during Áight andcause a crash.
*For a description of the condition deletion, refer to theCondition select function.

The Normal condition is always on, and remains on
until other conditions are activated by switches.
The priority is throttle hold/idle up 2/idle up 1/normal.
Throttle hold has the highest priority.
Add other conditions, as required.
The Condition delay can be programmed for eachchannel. The Condition delay is used to change the servo
throw smoothly when switching conditions.

(*eneral Àight condition setting example)
ŏ Normal: (8se initial setting conditions/operate
when switch OFF)
8se from engine starting to hovering.

ŏ Idle up 1: (Operate at SW-E center)8se in 540 stall turn, loop, rolling stall turn, and othermaneuvers.

*The Model type function automatically selects theappropriate output channels, control functions, and mixing
functions for the chosen model type. Eight swash types areavailable for helicopters.
*For a description of the swash type selection, refer to theModel type function.

46 ＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞

ŏ Idle up 2: (Operate at SW-E forward side)
8se in rolls.

ŏ Throttle hold: (Operate at SW-G forward side)
8se in auto rotation.

ŗőŃũƘƖƈƏƄƊƈŃƏƌƑƎƄƊƈ
Connect the throttle rudder, aileron, elevator, pitch,and other servos in accordance with the kit instruction
manual. For a description of the connection method, see"Servos connection by model type".
Note: The channel assignment of the FX-36
is different from that of our existing systems.
(The channel assigned to each function can
be checked at the Function menu of the
Linkage menu.)

ŏ Swash plate correction (Except H-1 mode)*If any interactions are noticed, for a description of thelinkage correction function, please refer to the SWASH
function.

ŘőŃŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŒųƌƗƆƋŃƆƘƕƙƈŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
This function adjusts the throttle or pitch operation
curve in relation to the movement of the throttle stick foreach condition.
ŏ If the direction of operation of the servo is
incorrect, use the Reverse function of the
Linkage menu. Also use the swash AFR
function in other than the H-1 mode.

Throttle curve setting example!
Call the throttle curve of each condition with thecondition select switch.
ŏNormal curve adjustment

Normal curve creates a basic throttle curve
centered near hovering. This curve is adjusted
together with the pitch curve (Normal) so that theengine speed is constant and up/down control iseasiest.

ŏIdle up curve adjustment

The low side Throttle curve creates a curve
matched for aerobatics (loop, roll, 3D, etc.).

ŏ Adjust the direction of operation of the gyro.
(Gyro side function)
ŏ Connect the throttle linkage so that the
carburetor can fully close at full trim throttle
cut.
ŏ Adjust the neutral position at the linkage
side and Àne tune with the Sub-Trim function
and End point function (rudder angle
adjustment). To protect the linkage, a limit
position can also be set with the End point
function.

ŏThrottle hold curve adjustment

The curve is not used when performing auto rotation
dives.
ConÀrm that the rate of the slowest position (0) of
the stick is 0 (initial setting).

<Example of pitch curve setting!
Call the pitch curve of each condition with thecondition select switch.
ŏPitch curve (Normal)

Make the pitch at hovering approximately 5º~6º.
Set the pitch at hovering with the stick position at
the 50 point as the standard.

*Stability at hovering may be connected to the throttle curve.
Adjustment is easy by using the hovering throttle function
and hovering pitch function together.

ŏPitch curve (Idle up 1)

The idle up 1 pitch curve function creates a curve＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞ 47

matched to airborne Áight.
Set to -7º~12º as standard.

ŏPitch curve (Idle up 2)

The high side pitch setting is less than idle up 1.
The standard is +8º.

ŏPitch curve (Hold)At auto rotation, use the maximum pitch at boththe high and low sides.
[Pitch angle setting example]
Throttle hold: -7º~+12ºśőŃŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃƋƒƏƇŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
*If throttle hold is necessary, please refer to the Throttle holdfunction.

ŜőŃŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃƆƘƗŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop the engine,by flipping a switch with the throttle stick at idle. The
action is not functional at high throttle to avoid accidental
dead sticks. The switch’s location and direction must be
chosen, as it defaults to INH.

řőŃŤũŵŃŋŧŒŵŌ
AFR (D/R) function is used to adjust the throw andoperation curve of aileron, elevator and rudder for eachcondition.
*For throttle and pitch curve settings, refer to the abovementioned "Throttle/Pitch curve setting"This is normally used after End point has de¿ned the
maximum throw directions.

*With throttle stick at idle, adjust the cut position until theengine consistently shuts off, but throttle linkage is not binding.

ŔœőŃŶƚƄƖƋŃŰƌƛŃƆƒƕƕƈƆƗƖŃƄƌƏƈƕƒƑŏŃ
ƈƏƈƙƄƗƒƕŃƄƑƇŃƓƌƗƆƋŃƌƑƗƈƕƄƆƗƌƒƑ
The swash mixing function is used to correct theswash plate in the aileron (Left/Right Cyclic) andelevator (Forward/Aft Cyclic) direction corresponding toeach operation of each condition.

ŚőŃŪƜƕƒŃƖƈƑƖƌƗƌƙƌƗƜŃƄƑƇŃƐƒƇƈŃƖƚƌƗƆƋƌƑƊ
The gyro sensitivity and mode switching function isdedicated gyro mixing of the Model menu, and can be set
for each condition.

ŔŔőŃŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃƐƌƛƌƑƊŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
*If throttle mixing is necessary to compensate for engine
slowing caused when the swash plate operates at the sametime as ailerons or elevator, please refer to the Throttle
mixing function.

ŔŕőŃŲƗƋƈƕŃƖƓƈƆƌƄƏŃƐƌƛƌƑƊƖ
ŏPitch to Needle mixingŏNormal condition (hovering): Gyro sensitivity
maximumŏIdle up 1/Idle up 2/Throttle hold: Gyro
sensitivity minimumŏHowever, at auto rotation of a tail-driven
helicopter, this function may not have any
effect at high gyro sensitivity.

48 ＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞

This mixing is used with engines that allow needle
control during flight (fuel-air mixture adjustment).
A needle curve can be set. The needle servo
rise characteristics at throttle stick acceleration/
deceleration operation can be adjusted.
(Acceleration function)ŏGovernor mixing

This mixing is dedicated governor mixing when agovernor is used. 8p to 3 rates (speeds) can beswitched for each condition.

ŶƈƕƙƒŃƆƒƑƑƈƆƗƌƒƑŃƅƜŃƐƒƇƈƏŃƗƜƓƈ
The FX-36 transmitter channels are automatically assigned for optimal combination according to the type selectedwith the Model type function of the Linkage menu. The channel assignment (initial setting) for each model type isshown below. Connect the receiver and servos to match the type used.
*The set channels can be checked at the Function screen of the Linkage menu. The channel assignments can also be changed.
For more information, read the description of the Function menu.

ŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŒƊƏƌƇƈƕ
ƔNormal tail and V tailAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron2

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

RudderThrottle

RudderThrottle

Rudder4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderAileron2

RudderAileron2

RudderAileron2

5

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Aileron2 Aileron2

Gear

Flap

Gear

Aileron3

Gear

Aileron3

6

Airbrake Airbrake Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Aileron2

Flap2

Aileron2 Aileron4 Aileron2 Aileron4

7

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

Flap

Flap3

Aileron3

Flap

Aileron3

Flap

8

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap2

Flap4

Aileron4

Flap2

Aileron4

Flap2

9

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX4

AUX4

AUX5

AUX5

Flap3

Motor

Flap

Motor

Flap

Flap3

10

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX4

AUX4

Flap4

AUX6

Flap2

AUX6

Flap2

Flap4

11

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Flap3

Motor

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

Flap4

AUX6

13

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

14

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX4

AUX4

15

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX3

Butterﬂy

16

AUX1

AUX1

CamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamber

DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

NormalV-tailElevator 1 servo＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞ 49

T-FHSS

AileronFASST MULT

1

FASSTest 18CH
The output
FASSTest 12CH
CH of each
S-FHSS
systemFASST 7CH

1AIL
2AIL
2AIL+1FLAP 2AIL+2FLAP 2AIL+4FLAP 4AIL+2FLAP 4AIL+4FLAPRX
CH Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane GliderŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŒƊƏƌƇƈƕ
ƔAilevator

AileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron2

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudder

5

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2

6

Airbrake Airbrake Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

7

Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3

8

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4

9

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap3

Flap3

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

10

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX4

AUX4

AUX5

AUX5

Flap4

Flap4

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

11

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX4

AUX4

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Flap3

Flap3

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Flap4

Flap4

13

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

Gear

AUX6

14

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

15

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX2

Butterﬂy

AUX2

Butterﬂy

AUX4

Butterﬂy

16

AUX1

AUX1

CamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamber Camber

DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

Elevator 2 servo

50 ＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞

T-FHSS

AileronFASST MULT

1

FASSTest 18CH
The output
FASSTest 12CH
CH of each
S-FHSS
systemFASST 7CH

1AIL
2AIL
2AIL+1FLAP 2AIL+2FLAP 2AIL+4FLAP 4AIL+2FLAP 4AIL+4FLAPRX
CH Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane GliderŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŒƊƏƌƇƈƕ
ƔTailless wing

4AIL+2FLAP

4AIL+4FLAP

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider1

AileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron

2

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudder

5

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Aileron2

Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Aileron3

Aileron3

Aileron3

Aileron3

6

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

Aileron4

Aileron4

Aileron4

Aileron4

7

AUX5

AUX5

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

Flap3

Flap3

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

8

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap4

Flap4

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

9

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

Flap3

Flap3

10

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Flap4

Flap4

11

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX4

AUX4

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

Gear

AUX6

13

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX5

AUX5

14

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX3

Butterﬂy

15

CamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamber16

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

Flying Wing

＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞ 51

T-FHSS

2AIL+4FLAPFASST MULT

2AIL+2FLAPFASSTest 18CH
FASSTest 12CH
S-FHSSFASST 7CH

2AIL+1FLAPThe output
CH of eachsystem2AILRXCH Airplane GliderŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŒƊƏƌƇƈƕ
ƔTailless wing :inglet 2 Rudder
4AIL+4FLAP

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

GliderAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron2

Rudder2

Rudder2

Rudder2

Rudder2

Rudder2

Rudder2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudder

5

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Aileron2

Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Aileron3

Aileron3

Aileron3

Aileron3

6

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

Aileron4

Aileron4

Aileron4

Aileron4

7

AUX5

AUX5

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

Flap3

Flap3

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

8

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap4

Flap4

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

9

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

Rudder2

Rudder2

Rudder2

Rudder2

Flap3

Flap3

10

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Flap4

Flap4

11

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Rudder2

Rudder2

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

Gear

AUX6

13

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX5

AUX5

14

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX3

Butterﬂy

15

CamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamber16

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

Airplane1

Rudder 2 servo* Output channels differ by each system of a table. When using a system with few channels,
there is a wing type which cannot be used. It cannot be used when there is a function
required out of the range of the arrow of a ¿gure.

52 ＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞

T-FHSS

4AIL+2FLAPFASST MULT

2AIL+4FLAPFASSTest 18CH

2AIL+2FLAPFASSTest 12CH
S-FHSSFASST 7CH

2AIL+1FLAPThe output
CH of eachsystem

2AIL

RX
CH

ūƈƏƌƆƒƓƗƈƕ

1

AileronAileron2

Elevator

Elevator

3

Throttle

Throttle

4

RudderRudder

5

Gyro

Gyro

6

Pitch

Pitch

7

Governor

Governor

8

Elevator2

Governor2

9

Gyro2

Gyro2

10

Gyro3

Gyro3

11

Governor2

Needle12

Needle

AUX5

13

AUX4
X4

14

AUX3

15

AUX2

16

AUX1

DG1

SW

DG2

SW

H-4/H-4X Swash

All other

1

AileronAileron2

Elevator

Elevator

3

Throttle

Throttle

4

Elevator2

Rudder

5

Pitch

Pitch

6

Gyro

Gyro

7

Governor

Governor8

RudderGovernor2

9

Gyro2

Gyro2

10

Gyro3

Gyro3

DG1

SW

DG2

SW

FASSTest 12CHCH

T-FHSS

All other

FASST MULT

H-4/H-4X Swash

The output
CH of eachsystemƔFASSTest 12CH

CH

The output FASSTest 18CH
CH of each S-FHSS
systemFASST 7CH

ƔFASSTest 18CH / FASST MULTI / FASST 7CH / S-FHSS＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞ 53

ŰƘƏƗƌƆƒƓƗƈƕ

2

Elevator

3

Throttle

4

Rudder

5

Gyro

6

Gyro2

7

Gyro3

8

Camera TILT

9

Camera PAN

10

Camera REC

11

Mode

12

AUX5

13

AUX4

14

AUX3

15

AUX2

16

AUX1

DG1

SW SD

DG2

SW SA

54 ＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞

T-FHSS

AileronFASST MULT

1

FASSTest 18CH
FASSTest 12CH
S-FHSSFASST 7CH

Multicopter

The output
CH of eachsystemCH

SYSTEM MENUThe System menu sets up functions of thetransmitter. This does not set up any model data.

ŏ When the System menu button is tapped,
the menu shown below is called up. Tap thefunction button that you want to enter.

ŏReturn to Home screenŶƜƖƗƈƐŃƐƈƑƘŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŃƗƄƅƏƈ
[Display]: Display adjustment.
[Sound volume]: Adjust the volume of: Other sound, Warning, Voice[Date and Time]: Sets the date and time (system clock setting) and resets the system timer.
[H/W setting]: Stick mode selection (Mode 1 - Mode 4 ). J1-J4 sticks correction can be performed.
[Battery]: Battery alarm voltage setting. Auto power off time setting.
Attention: When using the 5-cell NiMH battery, the alarm setting is 5NiMH. If you
use a 2SLiFe battery, change the setting for the undervoltage warning to 2LiFe, if you
use a 2SLiPo battery, change the setting to manual setting 7,0V.

[Battery]: Battery alarm voltage setting. Auto power off time setting.
[Range check]: The output of the transmitter is lowered, for Range checking.
[S.Bus servo]: S.Bus servo setting.
[Information]: Sets the User name, Language, and Unit system. Displays the program version, and SD
card information.

＜ System menu ＞ 55

Display
The following LCD screen adjustments:
ŏ Backlighting brightness adjustment
ŏ Backlighting decrease time adjustment
ŏ Touch screen calibration

ŏ Tap the [Display] button in the System menu
to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to System menu

Backlight max. brightness adjustment

Touch calibration

1. Adjust the backlighting brightness with thevalue input buttons.

This function adjusts the location of the Touch
Panel. Press the "Touch calibration" button.
The calibration screen will then pop up.
Tap the center of the cross hair cursor on
the screen with the soft pen. As soon as thesystem recogni]es the position, the cursor
will move on to the next position. Repeat thisprocedure as long as the cursor moves to next
position. You will do this Àve times. Calibration
will be carried out based on the Àve positions.
Disappearance of the cross hair cursor means
the calibration has been completed.

*When the Ÿ button is tapped, the backlighting becomesbrighter. When the ź button is tapped, the backlighting
becomes darker.

Backlight min. brightness adjustment
1. Adjust the backlight decrease brightness withthe value input buttons.
*When the Ÿ button is tapped, the backlighting becomesbrighter. When the ź button is tapped, the backlighting
becomes darker.
*It cannot be made brighter than Backlighting brightness
adjustment.

Backlight decrease time
1. You can set a time period to decrease the
LCD backlight. This function counts the periodthat the Touch Panel has been not operated.
This time can be set by ten-second steps. You
can also turn off the backlight decrease* ifyou like.
*The backlight consumes a large amount of power. We
recommend that you turn off the backlight by setting thebacklight power-off time to about one minute.

56 ＜ System menu ＞*In ordinary operation, this calibration is not necessary. If
you notice the Touch Panel is not functioning correctly after
long use, we recommend that you carry out this calibration.

Sound volume

Sound volume settingThis function can set the volume of "Other
sound," "Warning," and "Voice," respectively.
ŏ Tap the [Sound volume] button in the Systemmenu to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to System menu

The respective volume
control

Sound volume Setting method
1. When the Sound volume box is tapped, theabove screen will appear.

2. You can change the sound volume bytapping the " ▲▲ " " ▲ " " ▼▼ " " ▼ " buttonof four items.
*If you tap " ▲ ", the volume will increase. If you tap the" ▼ ", the volume will decrease.

Date and Time Date and time setting (system clock setting) and integrating timer resettingThis function adjusts the system clock of the
FX-36 transmitter. Perform this setting when you
purchase the set and when adjustment is necessary.

The system timer can also be reset.
*The system timer is displayed on the Home screen.

ŏ Tap the [Date and Time] button in the Systemmenu to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to System menu

● Total : Regardless of amodel, additional time incase a power supply is ON
is displayed.

Adjusts the clock ifpressed.

● Model : The additionaltime when the power
supply was set to ON isdisplayed for every model.

Resets the timer if
pressed.

Date setting

System timer reset

1. Tap the "Year", "Month", or "Day" button andset the date by tapping the "ʆʆ" "ʆ" "ʈʈ""ʈ" button.
2. Tap ´Time adjustµ, the timer is renewal.

The system timer shows the total timethat has elapsed since the last "reset".
1. Tap "Total" or "Model", to reset is chosen.
2. When the [System timer] button is tapped.
3. Tap ´Yesµ in the next screen, the timer isreset.

Time setting
1. Tap the "Hour" "Minute" or "Second" button,and set the time by tapping the "ʆʆ" "ʆ""ʈʈ" "ʈ" button.
2. Tap ´Time adjustµ, the timer is renewal.

＜ System menu ＞ 57

Stick mode selection and -1--4 sticks calibration

H/W setting

Stick mode
Mode 1-4 can be chosen.
But, it isn't change until data is reset.

Usually, this H/W setting is unnecessary.
Please perform this calibration only if a change at
the center of a stick should arise after prolonged use.
ŏ Tap the [Calibration] button in the Systemmenu to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn toSystem menu

To change the mode the stick ratchet
must be changed. Request that thisbe done by Futaba Service. (Charged
modi¿cation)

MODE1

MODE2

MODE3

MODE4

How to Calibrate
1. Tap the "Calibration" button.

*Please do not press the stick too ¿rmly in any direction when
doing the calibration.
*Check after calibration to make sure that neutral is 0%, thebottom right side is +100%, and the top left side is -100%.

2. Choose the stick to calibrate right and left.
3. The stick is set at neutral and the [Set neutral]
button is tapped.

TappedFull right andfull bottom

TappedThe stick is set at
neutralTapped

4. The stick is held at full right and full bottom(diagonal). The [Set endpoint] button istapped.
5. The stick is held at full left and full top(diagonal). The [Set endpoint] button istapped.

58 ＜ System menu ＞

Full left andfull topLow battery alarm voltage set

Battery

Select the battery alarm voltage according to thebattery to be used.
It isn't indicated in caseof manual setting.

ŏReturn to System menu

Battery type change :LiFe(2cells) → NiMH(5cells)→ Manual setting
When choosing manual
setting, the numericalvalue can be input.
It's dangerous to
set it manually inthe low voltage.

Auto power off time setting

Vibrator Types

This function prevents battery
discharging if the transmitter power
supply does not erase.
1. Adjust the auto power off time withthe value input buttons.

Type 1
Type 2*When the time the transmitter is inactive reaches
the set time, the power is turned off automatically.
This time can be set up to 1 hour in 10 minutes
increments. The auto power off function can also
be deactivated.

Type 3*When the low battery voltage setting is changed, it is changed forevery model in the transmitter. A unique voltage cannot be set foreach model. A change in the low battery voltage setting also does
not reset other data.

*An audible alarm is sounded from 3 minutes
before auto power off. When a stick or switch isoperated, the alarm is cleared.

Attention: When using the 5-cell NiMH battery, the alarm setting is 5NiMH. If you
use a 2SLiFe battery, change the setting for the undervoltage warning to 2LiFe, if you
use a 2SLiPo battery, change the setting to manual setting 7,0V.

Range Check

Before a Áight ground range check.

The 'range check mode' reduces the transmission
range of the radio waves to allow for a ground
range check.
*The range check mode, when activated, will continue for
90 seconds unless the user exits this mode early. When the
progress bar reaches 90 second mark, the RF transmission
automatically returns to the normal operating power.

WARNING
Do not ﬂy in the range check
mode.
*Since the range of the radio waves isshort, if the model is too far from thetransmitter, control will be lost and themodel will crash.

Refer to P.43
＜ System menu ＞ 59

S.Bus servo

S.B8S servo setting

An S.BUS(2) servo can memorize the channel
and various settings you input. Servo setting canbe performed on the FX-36 screen by wiring theservo as shown in the ¿gure.
* With some S.BUS(2) servos, there are some functions whichcannot be used. If a function cannot be used, the display
screen will change. (Only the function which can be used bya servo is displayed.)* After reading completion, with connection of the above¿gure, if a stick is moved, servo operation can be tested.

S.B8S/S.B8S2
Servoŏ Call the following setting screen by pressing the[S.Bus Servo] button in the System menu.
ŏReturn to System menu

Procedure for changing S.BUS servo setting
1. Select [S.Bus servo] of the System menu.
2. Wire the servo as shown in the Àgure.
3. Press [Read]. The ID and current setting ofthat servo are displayed.

4. When multiple servos are connected change[INH] at the right side of the ID number on thescreen to [ACT] and enter the ID of the servo
you want to set.
5. Set each item. (Please see the next page.)
6. Press [Write]. The settings are changed.

ƔServo ID number
If you use multiple S.BUS servos, only the desired
servo in the group can be set by entering the ID ofthat speci¿c servo.
3-way hubor Y-harnesses

SERVO

SERVO

SERVO

SERVO

SERVO

60 ＜ System menu ＞

S.BUS Servo Description of each parameter's function*There are functions that can and cannot be performed according to the servo type.

• ID
Displays the ID of the servo whose parameters are to be read. It cannot be changed.

• Channel
Channel of the S.BUS system assigned to the servo. Always assign a channel before use.

• Reverse
The direction in which the servo rotates can be changed.

• Soft Start
Restricts operation in the speciﬁed direction the instant the power is turned on. By using this setting, theﬁrst initial movement when the power is turned on slowly moves the servo to the speciﬁed position.

• Stop Mode
The state of the servo when the servo input signal is lost can be speciﬁed. The "Hold" mode setting holds
the servo in its last commanded position even if using AM or FM system.

• Smoother
This function changes smoothness of the servo operation relative to stick movement changes. Smoothsetting is used for normal ﬂight. Select the "OFF" mode when quick operation is necessary such as 3D.

• Neutral Offset
The neutral position can be changed. When the neutral offset is large value, the servo's range of travel isrestricted on one side.

• Speed Control
Speeds can be matched by specifying the operating speed. The speed of multiple servos can be matchedwithout being affected by motor ﬂuctuations. This is effective for load torques below the maximum torque.
However, note that the maximum speed will not exceed what the servo is capable of even if the servo's
operating voltage is increased.

• Dead band
The dead band angle at stopping can be speciﬁed.
[Relationship between dead band set value and servo operation]
Small Value Setting ĺ Dead band angle is small and the servo is immediately operated by a small signal
change.
Large Value Setting ĺ Dead band angle is large and the servo does not operate at small signal changes.
(Note) If the dead band angle is too small, the servo will operate continuously and the current
consumption will increase and the life of the servo will be shortened.

• Travel Adjust
The left and right travels centered about the neutral position can be set independently.

• BoostThe minimum current applied to the internal motor when starting the servo can be set. Since a small
travel does not start the motor, it essentially feels like the dead band was expanded. The motor can be
immediately started by adjusting the minimum current which can start the motor.
[Relationship between boost set value and servo operation]
Small Value Setting ĺ Motor reacts to a minute current and operation becomes smooth.
Large Value Setting ĺ Initial response improves and output torque increases. However, if the torque is toolarge, operation will become rough.

＜ System menu ＞ 61

• Boost ON/OFF
OFF : It is the boost ON at the time of low-speed operation.(In the case of usual)ON : It is always the boost ON.(When quick operation is hope)• DamperThe characteristic when the servo is stopped can be set.
When smaller than the standard value, the characteristic becomes an overshoot characteristic. If the value
is larger than the standard value, the brake is applied before the stop position.
Especially, when a large load is applied, overshoot, etc. are suppressed by inertia and hunting may occur,depending on the conditions. If hunting (phenomena which cause the servo to oscillate) occurs eventhough the Dead Band, Stretcher, Boost and other parameters are suitable, adjust this parameter to avalue larger than the initial value.
[Relationship between damper set value and servo operation]
Small Value Setting ĺ When you want to overshoot. Set so that hunting does not occur.
Large Value Setting ĺ When you want to operate so that braking is not applied. However, it will feel likethe servo response has worsened.
(Note) If used in the hunting state, not only will the current consumption increase, but the life of the servo
will also be shortened.

• Stretcher
The servo hold characteristic can be set. The torque which attempts to return the servo to the target
position when the current servo position has deviated from the target position can be adjusted.
This is used when stopping hunting, etc., but the holding characteristic changes as shown below.
[Relationship between stretcher and servo operation]
Small Value Setting ĺ Servo holding force becomes weaker.
Large Value Setting ĺ Servo holding force becomes stronger.
(Note) When this parameter is large, the current consumption increases.

• Buzzer
When a servo is powered up without a transmitter signal, a buzzer sounds.
(When transmitter signal is lost, a buzzer sounds until the servo regains the signal. This is not unusual.
The transmitter has been turned OFF ahead of a servo power supply → The buzzer sound of about 1.25
Hz continues sounding as servo power supply end failure alarm.
(Do not insert or remove the servo connector while the receiver power is ON.
sound by incorrect recognition.)

A buzzer may*Buzzer sound is generated by vibrating the motor of a servo.
Since current is consumed and a servo generates heat, please do not operate the number more thanneeded or do not continue sounding a buzzer for a long time.

WARNING
While S.BUS servo writes, you aren't
supposed to remove a connection of a
servo and turn oﬀ a power supply of atransmitter.
■Data of S.BUS servo is damaged and breaks
down.

62 ＜ System menu ＞

WARNING
Do not use the S.I/F (S.BUS servo setup)connector with anything other thanhigh-voltage-capable servos.
■Transmitter battery voltage is conveyed directly.
Using anything other than high-voltage-capableservos presents the danger that they will break.

Information

The program version and SD card si]e are displayed. The 8ser name,language and 8nit system used by the system can also be changed.

This function registers the FX-36 user nameand the language displayed at proportional can bechanged.

The Information screen displays the FX-36
system program version information, SD card
(memory size, card free size) information.

Telemetry numerical values can be displayed ineither metric or SAE (yard-pound) units.

*If an SD card is not inserted, no memory card information
will be displayed.
2/3 : WEB Manual QR code
3/3 : Manufacturer Information

ŏ Tap the [Information] button at the System menu
to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to System menu

Telemetry Display Unit
[Metric]
Distance --- m (meter)
Speed --- km/h (kilometers per
hour)
Variometer --- m/s (meter per
second)Temperature --- ℃ (centigrade)[Yard]
Distance --- yard
Altitude --- feet
Speed --- mph (mile per hour)
Variometer --- fpm (ft per min)Temperature --- ℉ (fahrenheit)
Movement of a cursor of an input box
Fix and return to an
information screen.

Back space (Input box)
Next page(Character list 2/4 - 4/4)
An input box is reset

Input boxŵƈƊƌƖƗƕƄƗƌƒƑŃƒƉŃƗƋƈŃƘƖƈƕŊƖŃƑƄƐƈ
FX-36 transmitter can register user's name.
How to register user's name
1. Turn on the power of the transmitter.
2. Select "user s name" and then the keyboard
will pop up.
3. You can use up to 15 characters as a user sname. 8se the keyboard on the screen toenter user s name.

The language displayed at proportional canbe changed. The initial setting is English, but
diﬀerent languages can be selected.

＜ System menu ＞ 63

LINKAGE MENU
The Linkage menu is made up of functions which
perform model addition, model type selection, end
point setting, and other model basic settings.
ŏ Tap the [Linkage menu] button in the Home
screen to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ Select the function
name and return to
the Home screen.

ůƌƑƎƄƊƈŃƐƈƑƘŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŃƗƄƅƏƈ
[Servo monitor]: Displays the servo test and operation position[Model select]: Model addition, call, deletion, copy, model name setting[Model type]: Model type, wing type, tail type, swash type, selection[Servo reverse]: Servo direction reversal[End point]: Servo basic rate adjustment and limit setting[Servo speed]: Servo speed setting[Sub-trim]: Adjusts the neutral position of each servo[Function]: Channel assignment of each function can be changed[Fail safe]: Fail safe function and battery fail safe function setting[System type]: System mode selection, link of a transmitter and receiver, telemetry mode selection[Trim setting]: Control step amount and mode selection of the digital trim
[Throttle cut]: Stops the engine safely and easily[Idle down]: Lowers the idle speed of the engine[Swash ring]: Limits the swash plate travel to within a ¿xed range. (helicopter only)[Swash]: Swash AFR and linkage correction function (helicopter only except swash type H-1)
[Stick alarm]: Can be set so that an audible alarm sounds when the throttle stick reaches the set position.
[Timer]: Timer setting[Function name]: Function name can be changed[Sensor]: Various telemetry sensors setting[Telemetry]: Displays various data sent from the receiver[Tele.setting]: Telemetry data log[Trainer]: Starts and sets the trainer system.
[Warning setting]: Mixing, throttle position warning reset[User menu setting]: Original menu making[Date reset]: Model memory set data reset (by item)

64 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Servo monitor

Servo Test

This is used for testing servo movement.
“Moving Test” (repetition mode) and “Neutral
Test” (¿xed position mode) are available.
The “Neutral Test” is good for finding theneutral position of a servo horn.

Graph Display / Displays servo positions.

In order to prevent any potential difficulties,
the servo test function will be inoperable, or
inaccessible, under certain conditions. Speci¿cally,
the Servo Test function is not operational if theThrottle cut is ON in either airplane or helicopter
modes; or if the Throttle hold is ON in helicopter
mode.
Test mode change :OFF → Neutral → Moving

ŏ Select [Servo monitor] at the linkage menu andcall the setup screen shown below.

＜ or ＞● Long press the [U/M]
button in the Home
screen to call the setup
screen shown.

ŏReturn to Home orLinkage menu

Each channel movement can be checked.

[Moving]: Mode which repeats operation ofeach servo[Neutral]: Mode which locks each servo in theneutral position

Select the [OFF] or pushing theH/E button → Testing is stopped

WARNING
Don't set a servo test mode when thedrive motor is connected and the engine
has been started.
■ Inadvertent rotation of the motor or acceleration of theengine is extremely dangerous.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 65

Model selectThe Model selection function performs model addition, call,deletion, copy, and model name setting.

This function is used to load the settings of thedesired model into the FX-36’s memory.
The settings may be selected from either thetransmitter’s built-in memory or an SD card
(32MB-2GB). Remember that up to 30 model
memories are available in the transmitter.
The name of the model stored in the transmitterand the SD card may be changed. This can be very
useful to tell different models settings apart. Eachmodel name can be as long as 15 characters, andthe model name always appears in the display
ŏ Select [Model select] at
the linkage menu andcall the setup screen
shown below.

screen.
The Copy function is used to copy one setof model data into a second memory within thetransmitter and the SD card. It may be used forgetting a head-start on setting up models withalmost the same settings (only differences need tobe modi¿ed, instead of entering the complete modelfrom scratch). Also, this function may be used tomake a backup copy of a model setup before anychanges are made. Furthermore, model data of FX32 can be used.
● When model data on
a SD card is used, thisicon appears.

＜ or ＞● Tap the [Model select]button in the Home
screen to call the setup
screen shown below.

ŏReturn to Home orLinkage menu

Current model isgreen.

Model addition
1. Tap the [New] button.

● "Save to"[Internal]: transmitter
memory[SD card]: SD card
The date by which themodel was made ﬁrst.
In case of a model on a
SD card, the file name isindicated. (The ﬁle name
can't be changed.)

2. Tap [Yes] to add the model. (When you wantto cancel model addition, tap [No].)*The added model is displayed in the model list.
*When a model is added, a receiver link is required.

66 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Model call

Model deletion

1. Tap the Internal or SD card. Select thelocation to which the desired model is to be
saved.

1. Tap the select model name or the model you
want to delete in the model list.
(The model currently selected cannot bedeleted.)2. Tap the [Delete] button.

Blue model would
be deleted.

2. Tap the desired model in the model list.
3. Tap the [Select] button.

3. Tap [Yes]. (When you want to stop model
deletion, tap [No].)

4. Tap [Yes] to call the model. (When you wantto cancel model call, press [No].)Blue model wasdeleted.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 67

Model name change

Model copy

1. The model data chosen at current model
can be changed. The current model name,tap.
2. When [Rename] is tapped, a keyboard
appears on the screen.

1. The model data chosen at current model
can be copied. The current model name,tap.

Current model (green)is chosen (blue).
Current model (green)is chosen (blue).

3. Enter the model name from this keyboard.
*Up to 15 characters can be input at the model name.

2. Tap the "Copy" button and tap thedestination button and select the copy
storage destination. (Internal or SD card)

When you are done
renaming, tap Model name.

3. When [Internal]or [SD card] is tapped,
copying is executed.

Completion of rename

WARNING
Never launch the Model Selection function
while the engine is starting or the motor drive
wiring is connected.
■Careless spinning of propellers or rotors isextremely dangerous.

WARNING
Carefully check that the aircraft to be used andthe model selected match up.
■Using a model which does not match the aircraft
runs the risk of the aircraft ﬂying out of control
and crashing. Perform a careful operations checkprior to ﬂight.

68 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Add new copied model*If there is no model with the same name in the copy
destination, the name of the copied model is saved. If there
is a model of the same name, a number is added at the endof the model name and the model is copied. You can change
the name later.
*Indication date : When the model data is copied, the creation
date for the current model is recorded.

This function selects the model type from among airplane, glider,helicopter, and multicopter.

Model type

Seven types of main wings (six types of Àyingwing) and three types of tail wings are available
for airplanes. Eight swash types are available
for helicopters. Seven types of main wings andthree types of tail wings are available for gliders.
Functions and mixing functions necessary for eachmodel type are set in advance at the factory.

Note: The Model Type function automatically selects
the appropriate output channels, control functions,and mixing functions for the chosen model type.
When the Model Type Selection command isaccessed, all of the data in the active memory iscleared. Be sure that you don·t mind losing this data,or back it up to another memory using the copying
functions.

( The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)ŏ Select [Model type] at the linkage menu and callthe setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to LinkagemenuModel type selection
1. Model type selection [Model icon], tap.
2. Set the Model type, Wing type(Airplane/
Glider), Tail type(Airplane/Glider), or Swash
type(Helicopter) by using the appropriate
button.
3. Set the type you choose by tapping[Enter] → [Yes] at the confirmation screen.
(When you want to cancel model typeselection, tap [No].)ŏ When a data change will occur, the confirmation
screen of data initiali]ation menu will be displayed.
A push on [yes] will initiali]e data and allow changes.
A push on [no] will stop data changes.

2. [Yes], tap
1. [Enter], tap＜ Linkage menu ＞ 69

Set the type you
choose by tapping.

Airplane/Glider : Choose thewing type and tail.

70 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Helicopter : Choose theswash type.

Servo Reverse

8se to reverse the servo throw direction.

Servo Reverse changes the direction of anindividual servo’s response to a control stick
movement.
For CCPM helicopters, be sure to read thesection on Swash AFR before reversing any servos.
With CCPM helicopters, always complete yourservo reversing prior to any other programming.
If you use pre-built Airplane/Glider functions that
control multiple servos, it may be confusing totell whether the servo needs to be reversed or asetting in the function needs to be reversed. See theinstructions for each specialized function for further
details. Always check servo direction prior to everyÀight as an additional precaution to con¿rm proper
model memory, hook ups, and radio function.

WARNING
Before a ﬂight, always check that yourmodel's servo operation, the directionof control surfaces, and switch setup
are correct.
Default setting of the throttle/motor
channel is always reverse.

ŏ Tap the [Servo reverse] button in the Linkagemenu to call the setup screen shown below.
Tap the channel you
wish to reverse.

ŏReturn to Linkage menu

(The display screen is an example. The screen depends on the model type.)

Tap the “Yes”→ Reverse

Servo reversing procedure
After setting up a new model, be sure todefine all special menus. Be sure that all servos
are plugged into the proper receiver channels.
Now, determine whether you need to reverse any
channels by moving each stick and observing thecorresponding movement in the model’s controls.

1. Tap the desired channel·s setting button tochoose the proper direction for the servo.
2. Tap ´Yesµ in the next screen.
3. Repeat for each servo needing reversal.
When done, tap ´Servo reverseµ to return to
the Linkage menu.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 71

Sets the travel, limit point.

End point

The End point function adjusts the left and right
servo throws, generates differential throws, andwill correct improper linkage settings.

30 〜
140%

The travel rate (normal full stick movement athigh rates) can be varied from 30% to 140% ineach direction on channels 1 to 16. Also, the limit
point (how far the servo travels when a mix is
involved) where servo throw stops may be varied
from 0% to 155%.

ŏ Tap the [End point] button in the
Linkage menu to call the setup
screen shown below.

Travel rate

30 〜
140%

Limit point
Next pageCh7-16

ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Tap the values you
wish to adjust andvalue input buttons
will appear on-screen.

Left / Top

Right / Bottom

Indicates the current
direction of the stick, etc.
(The display screen is an example. The screen depends on the model type.)

Servo travel adjustment

Limit point adjustment

1. Tap the travel button of the channel you
want to set. Value input buttons appear on
the screen.
2. 8se these buttons to adjust the rate.
ŏInitial value: 100ŏAdjustment range: 30~140
3. Repeat the procedure above for each rate.

1. Tap the limit button of the channel you want
to set.
2. 8se the value input buttons to adjust the limit
point.
ŏInitial value: 135ŏAdjustment range: 0~155
3. Repeat this procedure for each limit point.

72 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Servo speed

Sets the speed of each servo.

The Servo speed setting is used to set the servo
delay for each channel, from channel l to channel
16. The system uses the programmed speed (delay)
to slow down servo position changes. The Servo

speed setting can be varied from 0 to 27 in eachchannel.

ŏ Tap the [Servo speed] button in the Linkagemenu to call the setup screen shown below.

（First）0 〜 27（Slowly）

ŏReturn to Linkage menu

Servo speed setting
1. Tap the speed button of the channel you
want to set.
2. 8se the value input buttons to adjust the
servo speed.
ŏInitial value: 0ŏAdjustment range: 0~27 (steps)

3. Repeat this procedure for each channel.

Sub-trim

Setting of neutral position of each servo.

The Sub-Trim function is used to set the servo
neutral position, and may be used to make fineadjustments to the control surface after linkages

and pushrods are hooked up. When you begin to set
up a model, be sure that the digital trims are set totheir center position.

To close this screen, tap the [Servo speed]
button.

ŏ Tap the [Sub-trim] button in the Linkage menu tocall the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Linkage menu

Sub-trim adjustment
1. Tap the trim display part of the channel you
want to adjust.
Value input buttons appears on the Sub-trim
menu screen.

2. 8se the value input buttons to adjust the subtrim.
ŏInitial value: 0ŏAdjustment range: -240~+240 (steps)*See above

3. Repeat this step for each channel.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 73

Function

Channel assignment for each function can be changed to suit your needs.

When you select model and wing (swash) types,
you will find that the optimized combinations ofservo output channels and functions have been
already preset. If you would like, on the functionsetting screen of the linkage menu, you can freelychange combinations of servo output channels,
functions (aileron, elevator, etc), and input
controllers (sticks, switches, trim levers and trim
switches). You can also assign the same function tomultiple servo output channels such as assigningelevator function to CH2 and CH3.

DG1, DG2 (switch channels)
These two channels can be used as switch (On/Off) channels. You can freely change combinations
between servo output channels and input controllers(sticks, switches, trim levers and trim switches).
Channel restrictions by a System TypeFASSTest 18CH---16 CH+2 Switch
FASSTest 12CH---10 CH+2 Switch
FASST MULTI ---16 CH+2 Switch
FASST 7CH--- 7 CHS-FHSS--- 8 CH
T-FHSS---16 CH+2 Switch

ŏ Tap the [Function] button in the Linkage menu
to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Function change

Operation control change

1. Tap the function button of the channel you
want to change to call the Function select.

1. Tap the control button of the channel you
want to change. A control select screen(stick, switch, knob, trim lever, etc.) isdisplayed.

7$ %( )

/' 5'

&'*+

- 6,
/6 56 6-
7
7
7

7

-
-
7

2. Select the function you want to change.
2. Select the control you want to operate.
*The same control can be assigned to multiple channels.

74 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Trim change
1. Tap the trim button to call the trim setup
screen.

7$ %( )

/' 5'

&'*+

- 6,
/6 56 6-
7
7
7

7

-
-
7

H/W reverse
2. The following items can be set at the trim
setup screen.
ŏ Hardware setting (Selection of switch, etc.
which controls trim)ŏ Rate settingŏ Trim mode setting
Normal mode: Normal trim (linear) operation
ATL mode: ATL operation mode. (Works at only one
end of operation) Reverse is also possible.
Center mode: Maximum change near center by
center trim operation (Does not change at end of
the stick movement)This function reverses the operation signal of the
sticks, switches, trim levers, and knobs.
Note: This setting reverses the actual operation
signal, but does not change the display of theindicators on the display. Use the Normal mode aslong as there is no special reason to use the reverse
mode.

The Motor function is used when switching the
motor ON/OFF (mostly for motor gliders). For
most EP planes, the throttle can be left as-is whencontrolling the motor by stick. This means that thevarious throttle-related functions are usable via
motor control.

Tap the channel you
wish to reverse.
Tap the “Yes”→ H/W reverse＜ Linkage menu ＞ 75

Fail safe

Sets the servos operating position when transmitter signals can nolonger be received or when the receiver battery voltage drops.

The Fail safe function is used to set up positions
that the servos will move to in the case of radio
interference. De¿nes servo position when signals arelost and when receiver battery voltage becomes low.
You may set either of two positions for eachchannel: Hold, where the servo maintains its lastcommanded position, or fail safe, where each servo
moves to a predetermined position. You may choose
either mode for each channel.
The FX-36 system also provides you withan advanced battery monitoring function thatwarns you when the receiver battery has only alittle power remaining. In this case, each servo is
moved to the de¿ned failsafe position. The battery
failsafe may be released by operating a prede¿ned
control on the transmitter (default is throttle). Do
not continue to fly. Land as soon as possible.
Remember, if the predefined control suddenly

moves to a position you did not command, land atonce and check your receiver battery.
Do not continue to Ày. Land as soon as possible.
Defines servo position when signals are lost andwhen receiver battery voltage becomes low.

WARNINGFor safety, always set the fail safe functions.
■ Especially set the throttle channel fail safe function
so that the servo moves to the maximum slow side
for airplanes and to the slow side from the hovering
position for helicopters. Crashing of the model at fullhigh when normal radio waves cannot be received due
to interference, etc., is very dangerous.
■ If fail safe is reset by throttle stick movement, the failsafe may be mistaken as an engine malfunction andwill be reset at low throttle and the model will continue
to ﬂy. If you have any doubts, immediately land.

ŏ Tap the [Fail safe] button in the Linkage menu to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Fail safe setting procedure
Decide which channels you want to go to preset
positions, and which ones you want to maintaintheir last commanded position. To select the failsafe mode you wish to set, use the F/S button. Thisbutton toggles between the two modes. (Hold, F/S)
F/S mode setting:
1. Tap the F/S button of the channel you want
to set, and set that channel to the [F/S]mode.
2. Hold the corresponding stick, control, slider,or other control in the position you want the
servo to move to when the fail safe functionis activated, and tap the F/S position button.
That position is displayed in percentage.
*When you want to return that channel to the Hold mode, tap
the [F/S] button again.

Battery fail safe setting procedure
To select the B.F/S mode, tap the [B.F/S] button.
Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between[OFF] and [B.F/S].

76 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

B.F/S setting:
1. Tap the [B.F/S] button of the desired channel
to set it to the B.F/S mode.
2. Hold the corresponding stick, VR, slider,or other control in the position you want
the servo to move to when the battery failsafe function is activated, and tap the F/S
position button. This position is displayed inpercentage.
*When you want to return that channel to OFF, tap the [B.F/S]
button again.

Battery Fail safe release function
This function releases the predefined control
from its held position after indicating that yourreceiver battery is low.
1. Enter the control setting screen by tapping
the Battery F/S release button. Now, you may
choose whether moving the throttle resets
the condition, or select a stick or switch todeactivate it. To set a desired throttle release
position, move the throttle stick to the point
at which you wish the B.F/S to be released.

System type

System mode setting, Receiver link

System Type selection

Dual receiver function (only FASSTest 18CH )The FX-36 is for 2.4GHz only. The system canbe changed from among 6 choices: FASSTest
18CH, FASSTest12CH, FASST MULTI, FASST
7CH, T-FHSS, S-FHSS. It is FASSTest18CH andFASSTest12CH which can be chosen by R7008SB
set. The method of selection is on the next page.

Dual receivers can be linked with the FX-36.
Two receivers are recognized individually by ID
numbers. For example, in R7008SB, CH output
setting function is used, by setting the first as as"1-8CH", and setting the second as "9-16CH".
Two sets of receivers can be used as a set in themodel, allowing you 16 channels. Separate fail-safe
voltage can be set to each receiver.
However, telemetry cannot be used for the 2ndreceiver.

*If you change the System type, other model data is not reset.
*After any change, remember to test the model and fully
check servo direction and motion.
*Analog servos cannot be used with the R7008SB in the
FASSTest12CH mode.

ŏ Select [System type] in the Linkage menu
and access the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkagemenu

Telemetry function (FASSTest /T-FHSS mode
only)
To use the telemetry function, set “Telemetry” to“ACT”.

Receiver linking
The receiver will only be controlled (without
being affected by other transmitters) by thetransmitter it is linked to. When using a receiver
other than one purchased as a set, linking isnecessary.
Moreover, a re-link is required when a newmodel is added by model selection, and at the timeof system type change.
Linking method

P.40

Cases when linking is necessary:
・When using a receiver other than the initial setting.
・When the communication system was changed.
(FASSTest18CH ↔ FASSTest12CH etc. )・When a new model was created by model
selection.

DL Interval (FASSTest/T-FHSS mode only)
When a telemetry function is enabled, thereceiving interval (down-link interval) of sensor
data can be changed.
If a DL interval is increased, the response of
the sensor data display becomes slower, but stick
response will improve.
Battery fail-safe voltage setup (FASSTest /T-FHSS mode only)
The voltage at which battery fail-safe activatescan be set when you link. (3.5-8.4V) The receiver
memorizes the setting as it was at link.
Since power consumption varies with battery
type, servos and condition, please select the failsafe activation voltage for your own model.
＜ Linkage menu ＞ 77

The example for choosing System Type-Response speed haspriority over numberof channels-Want to use apreviously used
receiver as is-Want to use aminiature receiver
for indoor planes-Want to use a large
number of telemetryfunctions-Telemetry requires
only the current
receiver battery

FASST MULTIFASSTest 12CH

R7008SB
R7003SB
R7014SB
R7018SB
R7006SB-Want to use an
S-FHSS systemminiature receiver

FASST 7CH

-Want to use more channels-Want to use a large numberof telemetry functions

FASSTest 18CH

-Want to use an
T-FHSS system
receiverR7008SB
R7003SB
R7014SB
R7018SB
R7006SB

R608FS
R6008HS
R6108SB
R6208SB
R6014HS
R6014FS
R6203SB
R6203SBE
R6202SBW
R6303SB
R6303SBE
R7014SB
R7018SB
R7006SB

T-FHSS Air
R617FS
R6004FF
R616FFM
R6106HF
R6106HFC
R6203SB
R6203SBE
R6202SBW
R6303SB
R6303SBE
R7006SB

R3006SB
R3008SB
R3001SB*R3106GF

S-FHSSR2006GS
R2106GF
R2008SB
R2001SB(Usable receivers)(As of March 2017)*Remark --- R3106GF is none telemetry
6 channels receiver. R3106GF does nothave telemetry function.

System type
■ FASSTest 18CH --- FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with the telemetry sensor unit. Up to
18 channels (linear16+ON/OFF2) can be used.
■ FASSTest 12CH --- FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with receiver voltage display. Up to 12channels (linear10+ON/OFF2) can be used. Telemetry Sensor cannot be used, but
the response speed is faster than that of the 18CH mode.
• Analog servos cannot be used with the R7008SB in the FASSTest 12CH mode.

■ FASST MULTI---FASST-MULTI system receiver mode. Up to 18 channels (linear16+ON/OFF2) canbe used.

■ FASST 7CH--- FASST-7CH system receiver mode. Up to 7 channels can be used.

■ T-FHSS Air--- T-FHSS system receiver mode. Applicable with the telemetry sensor unit. Up to 18
channels (linear16+ON/OFF2) can be used.

■ S-FHSS--- S-FHSS system receiver mode. Up to 8 channels can be used.

78 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Trim setting (T1-T6)

Digital trim settings

This function adjusts the digital trim's control
step amount and operation mode (T1-T6).

When the flight conditions are set, the trim
operation can be coupled with among all theconditions which combination mode is selected.

ŏ Select [Trim setting] at the linkage menu and callthe setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to LinkagemenuControl step amount setting
1. The [Step] item tap the screen to the data
input mode.
Set the control step amount by tapping the" ▲▲ " " ▲ " " ▼▼ " " ▼ " button.
Initial value: 4Adjustment range: 1~200

Separate/combination mode selection[Comb.]: Combination mode. The trim data
are reÁected at all the Áight conditions.
[Separ.]: Separate mode. Trim adjustment foreach Áight condition.

(When the value is tapped, the control stepamount is reset to the initial value.)*When the value is made large, the change per step becomeslarger.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 79

Throttle cut

Stops the engine safely and easily.

Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop theengine, by Àipping a switch with the throttle stick at
idle. The action is not functional at high throttle to
avoid accidental dead sticks. The switch’s locationand direction must be chosen, as it defaults to " −− ".

Tapping this will change
INH to either OFF or ON
and activated.

ŏ Tap the [Throttle cut] button in the Linkage menu tocall the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

The yellow line is thecut position. Whenthe cut switch is ON,
the throttle will moveto this position.

This is the throttle cut
position. Tapping thiswill display value input
buttons on-screen. Set
the engine stop position.
Tapping this will pull up the
hardware selection screen.
Select the throttle cut switch
and ON-OFF direction.

Throttle cut setting procedure
1. Tap the "INH" button.
2. Throttle cut function switch setting:
Tap the "--" button to call the Hardware
select! screen, and then select the switch
and its ON direction.
(For a detailed description of the selection
method, see [Switch selection method] atthe back of this manual.)
3. Throttle cut position setting:
Tap the cut position button. Value input
buttons appear on the screen.
8se these buttons to adjust the cut
position rate.

80 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

This indicates the throttle stick's current
position. Throttle cut will only function
when the throttle stick is more than 1/3rd
into the slow throttle range.

ŏInitial value: 17ŏAdjustment range:（LOW）0~50（Middle）*With throttle stick at idle, adjust the rate until the engine
consistently shuts off.

To exit the setting, tap the [Throttle cut]
button.

Lowers the engine idling speed.

Idle down

The Idle down function lowers the engine's idleby Àipping a switch with the throttle stick at idle.
The action is not functional at high throttle to avoid
accidental dead sticks. The switch’s location anddirection must be chosen, as it defaults to " −− ".
ŏ Select [Idle down] at the linkage menu
and call the setup screen shown below.

Tapping this will change
INH to either OFF or ON
and activated.

ŏReturn to Linkage menu

This is the idle down
throttle position. Tapping
this will display value input
buttons on-screen. Set theengine's max. low position.
Range:（↑）-100 〜 +100（↓）
Pressing and holding avalue will reset it to 0.

Tapping this will pull up the
hardware selection screen.
Select the idle down switch
and ON-OFF direction.

This is the current position bar for thethrottle stick. Throttle cut will only
function when the throttle stick is morethan halfway into the low throttle range.

Idle down setting procedure
1. Tap the "INH" button to activate the Idle
down function.
2. Idle down function switch setting:
Tap the "--" button to call the Hardware
select! screen, and then select the switch
and its ON direction.
(For a detailed description of the selection
method, see [Switch selection method] atthe back of this manual.)

3. Offset rate setting:
Tap the offset rate button. Value input
buttons appear on the screen.
8se these buttons to adjust the offset rate.
ŏInitial value: 0ŏAdjustment range: -100~100*(-)becomes an idle up.
To exit the setting, tap the [Idle down]
button.

Landing
Idling, lower

Oﬀset rate
＜ Linkage menu ＞ 81

Swash ring

Limits the swash travel within a Àxed range to prevent linkage damage(Helicopter only)This function limits the travel of the swash
plate to prevent linkage damage as the aileron andelevator operation is used. It is useful for 3D helisetting.
ŏTap the [Swash ring] button in the Linkage menu tocall the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu
The movement range
display shows control
input for elevator andaileron direction.
The marker represents
the stick's position.

Swash ring setting procedure
1. Push the Swash ring button on the linkagemenu.
2. Push ACT/INH button to activate.
*The movement area monitor shows the current aileron andelevator values and limit ranges by the yellow circle.

3. Adjust the rate to the maximum amount ofswash plate decline.
*The swash movement is limited within the circle.

Adjustment range: 50 - 200.

82 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Setting the function to"ACT" will display theswash ring and [Rate]
percentage.

SwashSwash operation linkage correction function (helicopter only, except
swash type H-1).

Neutral Point

Mixing Rate

At your linkages, if the servo horn deviates froma perpendicular position at neutral, the linkage
compensation functions in this menu may notcompensate effectively. To correct this use theneutral point function. This will move the neutral
point of the servos to the actual perpendicular
position. However, this adjustment changes only
the axis point of the compensation functions in thismenu, and does not affect the neutral position ofother functions.

This compensation mixing is used to correct
the tendency of the swash-plate for each control.
The following compensation mixing is possible:
PIT to AIL, PIT to ELE, AIL to PIT, ELE to AIL,
and ELE to PIT (HR3 mode.) It adjusts the swashplate to operate correctly for each control using thecorresponding compensation mixing.

Swash AFR
Swash AFR function reduces/increases/reverses
the rate (travel) of the aileron, elevator andcollective pitch functions, by adjusting or reversing
the motion of all servos involved in that function,
only when using that function.

Linkage Compensation
This compensation mixing is used to correct thetendency of the swash-plate for pitch control at low
pitch and high pitch.
Speed Compensation
This function is used to cancel the reaction that is
generated by the difference of the operation amountof each servo when the swash-plate moves.

ŏ Select [Swash] at the linkage menu and call the
setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Linkage menu

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 83

Neutral point setting procedure*Becomes the compensation reference point.
*Adjusting the servo horn so that the neutral point position isnear the 50% position makes the mixing amount small.

1. Hold the servo horn at a right angle to thelinkage rod, and then tap the [Enter] button
and read the actual neutral point.
*The neutral point is displayed on the screen.

After reading this neutral point, use othercompensation functions to make further
adjustments.
To exit the setting, tap the [Swash] button.

Swash AFR setting procedure
Adjust so that the specified operation
amount is obtained by aileron, elevator, andpitch operation.
1. Tap the button of the AFR rate to be
adjusted. Value input buttons appear on thescreen.
2. 8se the value input buttons to adjust the AFR
rate.
Initial value: +50
Adjustment range: -100~+100
+or- the direction of operation changes.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.

Mixing rate setting procedureHR-3 is described as an example. The mixing
applied in other swash modes is different, but
the setting procedure is the same.
1. Set the throttle stick to the set neutral point.
Adjust the length of the linkage rod so thatthe swash plate is hori]ontal at this position.
*A little adjustment using sub trim should be OK.
*Adjust so that pitch operation when the pitch curveis straight is maximum.
2. Adjust the AIL-!PIT amount so there is nointerference in the elevator or pitch direction
when the aileron stick is moved to the left
and right.
*Adjust the left and right sides separately.
3. Adjust the ELE-!AIL and ELE-!PIT amounts sothere is not interference in the aileron or pitch
direction when the elevator stick is moved
up and down.
*Adjust the up and down sides separately.
4. Adjust the PIT-!AIL and PIT-!ELE amounts sothat the swash plate is hori]ontal when thethrottle stick is set to maximum slow and fullhigh.
*Adjust the slow and high sides separately.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.

84 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Linkage correction setting procedure*Set the linkage compensation after setting the mixing
rate.
*This function compensates for elevator interferenceby aileron operation or aileron interference by
elevator operation at Low pitch and Hi pitch atcollective pitch (HR3, etc.) control.
1. Set the throttle stick to the maximum slow
position. Move the aileron stick to the left andright and adjust the aileron compensation
amount so that interference in the elevatoror pitch direction at that time is minimal.
*The left and right sides can be adjusted separately.
*If the interference increases when the compensation
amount is increased, make the compensation
direction "-".
2. Adjust the elevator compensation amountso that the interference in the aileron or pitch
direction when the elevator stick is moved
up and down is minimal.
3. Perform aileron and elevator compensation
similarly for the throttle stick full high side.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.

Speed compensation setting procedure
1. Set the throttle stick to the neutral point
position. Move the elevator stick Tuickly andadjust the speed compensation amount sothat the interference in the pitch direction isminimal.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.
Notes:
If the linkage is too long or short, correctcompensation will not be applied. Correct
this before continuing. The pitch angle
changes after any adjustment. Reset thepitch angle when actually flying after
compensation processing.

Stick alarm
An alarm (single beep) can be sounded at the
speci¿ed throttle stick position.
ŏAlarm function ON/OFF can be set by switch.
Tapping this will change
INH to ON and activated.

If the throttle stick
reaches the yellow
line, an alarm willsound.

ŏReturn to Linkage menu

This is the current
position display bar
for the throttle stick.

This is the throttle stick
alarm position. Push thethrottle stick to the desired
position and tap the value.
Range:（Low）0 〜 100（High）

Tapping this will pull up the hardware selection
screen. Select the switch and ON-OFF direction if
turning the function ON-OFF by switch.

If the throttle stick
reaches the desired
position , an alarm(single beep) willsound.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 85

Timer setting

Timer

The Timer function may be set forany desired time, i.e. engine run time,
specified times for competitions, etc.
Two independent timers are provided
for your use. The timers are stored
independently with each model, meaningthat when you switch between model
setups, the timer associated with the newmodel is brought up automatically.
The timers may be set to start and stopfrom the motion of any switch or stick.
You may set the ON and OFF directions
freely. Each timer has a capacity of up to
59 minutes 59 seconds.

Each timer may be set for count-down or count up
operation with a target time.
If a target time is set and the timer reaches the set time, abuzzer sound for each count is generated.

Last twenty seconds Last ten seconds Target timeTime：

Alarm :

ŏ Select [Timer] at the linkage menu andcall the setup screen shown below.

One shortbeep

Two short
Also
beeps

A Buzzer or Speech
can be chosenŏReturn to
Linkage menu

beepContinue counting
with displaying a
minus (-) sign.

Elapsed: Minute-by-minutealarm starting from 00:00
Remainder : Minute-byminute alarm counting downfrom a designated time

Constant:The alarm
does not stop
One time: Stop thealarm at once

[Inhibit] → [Type1-4]
If it carries out like this,a vibration function
will work.

OFF: Turning the power OFF and switching models will reset the timer.
ON: Previous timer is put into memory and will restart from where it stopped.
[Start/Stop] → Home screen
A timer on the home screen starts and stops its
countdown directly from there when tapped.
Tapping and holding the display will reset the timer.

Timer 1

Timer 2Up timer/Down timer selection

Start/Stop/Reset switch setting

1. Tap the mode button and select the type oftimer.
2. Timer time setting.
Tap the Mode minutes or seconds button.
Value input buttons appear on the screen.
8se these buttons to set the timer time.

1. Tap the Start/Stop/Reset SW "--" button tocall the Switch! screen, and then select theswitch and its ON direction.
(For a detailed description of the selection
method, see [Switch selection method] atthe back of this manual. The timer switches
can be set for each condition.)86 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Integration Timer
INT (integration) Timer is the function which changes progress of a timer according to the locationof the throttle stick. When the throttle stick is raised for faster speed, the speed of the timer usually
increases. With the throttle stick at mid-range speed, the timer speed decreases (to 50%). When thethrottle is positioned at low end, the timer's progress stops. It's possible to set it in the time which¿ts power consumption of your fuselage.
*The consumption of the battery/fuel is different depending on the conditions, so use an INT Timer as
reference.
*The INT (integration) time is different from the actual elapsed time.

When a throttle stick is thehigh side, the speed of thetimer usually increases.

High
When a throttle stick is
middle-speed, the timer
speed decreases (by 50%).

MiddleWhen a throttle stick is low,timer progress stops.

Lowŏ Select [Timer] at the linkage menu and call the setup
screen shown below.
INT Time◆ Start INT timer
Nomal TimerTap

INT time (%)

TH% : Integration Timer＜ Linkage menu ＞ 87

Function name

Function name can be changed

The name of the spare functions (Auxiliary 1-8)
can be changed for the full name (10 characters) orfor the abbreviated name (4 characters).

ŏ Tap the [Function name] button in the Linkagemenu to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Linkage menu

Function name change method
1. Select [Function name] from the Linkagemenu and tap the screen.
2. The Function name setup screen is displayed.
3. When the function whose name is to bechanged is selected and the screen istapped, a modiÀcation screen is displayed.
4. Select the function to be renamed andselect [Rename] and tap the screen. A
character input screen is displayed. Input thefunction name.

5. When [Reset] is selected and the screen isheld down, the function name is set to theinitial state function name.

88 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

6. The function name may be displayed in 10
characters or 4 characters, depending on
the setup screen. For 4-character display,
input the function name as reTuired.

Telemetry system
This screen displays and sets the various information from the receiver. An alarm and vibration can begenerated depending on the information. For example, a drop in the voltage of the receiver battery housedin the aircraft can be reported by an alarm.
● This function can only be used in the FASSTest18CH mode and T-FHSS mode. The FASST/S-FHSS mode cannot use
telemetry.
● FASSTest12CH mode. Applicable with receiver voltage display.
● Telemetry sensors sold separately can be mounted in the aircraft to display a variety of information. (Receiver voltage
does not require a sensor.)● The telemetry function cannot be used if the telemetry mode of the parameters is not ACT.
● FASSTest18CH : When 2 receivers are used with 1 transmitter, the telemetry cannot be used for the 2nd receiver.
● T-FHSS/FASSTest12CH : When 2 receivers are used with 1 transmitter, the telemetry function cannot be used.
● If the transmitter and receiver are linked, but the receiver's ID is not recorded in the transmitter's memory, the telemetryfunction cannot be used.
● Turning OFF the receiver after use will cause the telemetry data just prior to this to be displayed. (Even when thereceiver's power is turned OFF, the receiver voltage is not 0.0V.)

Viewing the receiver voltage.

Setting is unnecessary. When menu telemetry islistened to, the voltage appears.

P.89

Viewing the drive battery
voltage.

CA-RVIN-700 and wiring work are necessary.

P.96

Using various optional
telemetry sensors.

Optional telemetry sensors are necessary. FX36 setting is unnecessary.

P.91

Using several telemetry
sensors of the same type.

Setting by "sensor" in the menu is necessary.
(Register is necessary.)

P.92

Setting alarms from thetelemetry information.

Setting by "Telemetry" in the menu is necessary.

Viewing the telemetry data

P.95 〜 111＜ Home display ＞

Receiver → Transmitter. The reception of the signal
from the receiver to the transmitter is shown. This
does not aﬀect ﬂight.
Receiver voltage andExt voltage display

CAUTION
Do not stare at or set the transmittersetting screen while ﬂying.
■ Losing sight of the aircraft during ﬂight is very
dangerous.
■ When you want to check the information during
ﬂight, call the telemetry screen before ﬂight andhave the screen checked by someone other thanthe operator.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 89

Homedisplay

H/E is pushed

16 of telemetry data is displayed*Be aware that pressing and holding this activates the key lockYou can choose
which type of sensor
to display for four
displays. Tap the sensor
type.

For some sensor types,
you can choose thedisplay item. Tap toselect.

);

Telemetry Schematic
Info

Signal)XVH
Info&$59,1ZLWKH[WHUQDOSRZHULQSXWPXVWEHOHVVWKDQ9

Drive battery

Receiver%UDQFK

0RWRU&RQWUROOHU

Drive battery voltage isdisplayed at the transmitter.

Battery voltage isdisplayed at the transmitter.

Info

6%86SRUW

6ZLWFKInfo+XE

7HUPLQDOER[
Info

+XE

7HPSHUDWXUH
6HQVRU

Slot 1530
6HQVRU

Slot 2$OWLWXGH
6HQVRU

Slot 3 〜 5

9ROWDJH
6HQVRU

Slot 6 〜 7*36
6HQVRU

Slot 8 〜 15

6HQVRU

Slot 16
Slot 17

6HQVRU
Info

90 ＜ Linkage menu ＞+XE

Slot 31

Various telemetry sensors setting

SensorThis screen registers the telemetry sensors usedwith the transmitter. When only one of a certain
type of sensor is used, this setting is unnecessary
and the sensor can be used by simply connecting itto the S.BUS2 port of the transmitter.
When using 2 or more of the same kind of
sensor, they must be registered here.
ŏ Tap the [Sensor] button in the Linkage menu
to call the setup screen shown below.

Slot Number[What is a slot?]
Servos are classified by CH, but sensors areclassified in units called “slot”. There are slots from
No. 1 to No. 31.
Altitude sensors, GPS sensors and other data
sensor units may use multiple slots.
When using a sensor which uses two or more slots,
the required number of slots is automatically assignedby setting up a start slot.
When 2 or more of the same kind of sensor are used,
the sensors themselves must allocate unused slots andmemorize that slot.

Registered sensor

Sensor ID : Multiple usage of sensorsof the same type requires an ID
be input. Tapping this will allow
for manual input, but see the next
page about how to perform autoregistration via sensor registration.

Tap the slot to display
sensors which can be used
for the start slot. Tap toregister the sensor.

This is what displays when no
sensor is registered in a slot.
Tapping the slot and selecting"-----------" will erase whatever was
registered there, freeing up theslot.

ŏ As shown in the table below, an altimeter reTuires 3 contiguous slots and a GPS sensor
reTuires 8 contiguous slots. The GPS (SBS-01/02G) start slots are 8, 16, and 24.

＜ Assignable slot ＞*Altimeter, GPS, and other sensors that display a large amount of data require multiple slots.
*Depending on the type of sensor, the slot numbers that can be allocated may be limited.

TEMP (SBS-01T/TE)
RPM (SBS01RM/RO/RB)

The required
number of slots
1 slot1 slotVoltage (SBS-01V)

2 slots

Altitude (SBS-01/02A)

3 slots

Current (SBS-01C)

3 slots

SensorS.BUS Servo sennsor（SBS-01S)
GPS(SBS-01/02G)
TEMP125-F1713

8 slots
1 slotVARIO-F1712

2 slots

VARIO-F1672

2 slots

CURR-F1678

3 slots

GPS-F1675
Kontronik ESC
Castle TL0

8 slots
8 slots
8 slots

JetCat V1014 slots

PowerBox

16 slots

6 slots

The number which can be used as a start slot
1-31
1-31
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
1,2,8,9,10,16,17,18,
24,25,26
8,16,24
1-31
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
8,16,24
8,16,24
8,16,24
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,
18
8,16

Selling area

GlobalEurope＜ Linkage menu ＞ 91

Sensor：Reload

This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.

When using multiple sensors of the same typethe sensors must be registered in the transmitter.
Connect all the sensors to be used to the FX-36 asshown in the ¿gure at the right and register them by
the following procedure. The ID of each sensor isregistered in the transmitter.

);ŏ Call page 3/3 from the [Sensor] menu.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Hub

Hub

SENSORSENSOR

Sensor : Register

SENSOR

1. Connect the sensor to the FX-36 as shown in the Àgure above.
2. Tap ´Reloadµ on page 3/3 of the [Sensor] screen.
3. Tap ´Reloadµ.
All the sensors are registered and can be used.

SENSORSENSOR

Reading all the sensors to be used

Hub

*It is not necessary to carry out
multiple battery connections likea T18M=/T14SG.

This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.

This function registers an additional sensor.
Connect the sensor as shown in the figure at theright and register it by the following procedure.
The sensor ID is registered in the transmitter.

);ŏ Call page 3/3 from the [Sensor] menu.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

SENSOR*It is not necessary to carry out
multiple battery connections likea T18M=/T14SG.

Additional sensor registration
1. Connect the sensor to the FX-36 as shown in the figure
above.
2. Tap ´Registerµ on page 3/3 of the Sensor! screen.
3. The sensor is registered and can be used.

92 ＜ Linkage menu ＞*When the number of slots needed inregistration is insufficient, an error isdisplayed and registration cannot be
performed. Disable unused slots or
perform the following reload.

Sensor : Change slot

This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensorsof the same type.

This procedure changes the slot number of one
registered sensor.
);ŏ Call page 3/3 from the [Sensor] menu.

SENSORŏReturn to
Linkage menu

*It is not necessary to carry out
multiple battery connections likea T18M=/T14SG.

ŏ Tap the [Change slot] buttonin the Sensor screen to call the
setup screen shown below.

*For some transmitters (e.g., T6K), when the start slot of asensor is changed, the sensor cannot be used.

Sensor slot change
1. Connect the sensor to the FX-36 as shown inthe Àgure above.
2. Tap ´Change slotµ on page 3/3 of theSensor! screen.
3. Tap ´Readµ.
4. A sensor details screen appears.
5. The current start slot is displayed. To changea start slot, a ＋ Ɇ button, tap.（Cannot be
set to a slot that cannot be allocated like thetable of all pages.）
6. Tap to the ´Writeµ.

WARNING
Do not disconnect or turn transmitter
power OFF while telemetry sensor data
is being saved.
Sensor save data will be lost, resulting in
malfunction.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 93

Telemetry

Displaying data from the receiverThis screen displays your choice of data from thereceiver.
Also warnings can be activated regarding thedata. For example, if the receiver voltage drops, theuser can be warned by an alarm (and vibration).

ŏ Tap the [Telemetry] button in the Linkage menu tocall the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Linkage menu

Tap page button toadvance to next page.
( The number of pages
changes with the numberof sensor registration.)

Various telemetry data
Start slot number

Choose the desired sensor and tap.

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Display Sensors
Default display sensors can only be used byconnecting the sensors to the receiver. For displayof other sensors or to use the same type of sensor in
multiple cases, either register them via the "Sensor"
option on the Linkage menu or allocate the sensors
to empty slots to have them display on the Telemetry
screen. Refer to the previous "Sensor" explanation
pages for how to do this.

94 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Displaying data from thereceiver battery voltage

Telemetry: Receiver [Battery]In this screen, the battery voltage of a receiver isdisplayed.
If it becomes higher or lower than the settin, an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

ŏ Tap the [Receiver] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Receiver battery
voltageMax. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↓ The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound whenthe voltage drops to
below the setting.

Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Alarm set
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [4.0V] item.
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: 4.0V
Adjustment range: 0.0V~100.0V"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the H/E button.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 95

Displaying data from the EXT
battery voltage port

Telemetry: Receiver [Ext. battery]
The EXT-VOLT screen will display the data fromthe EXT-battery output from the R7008SB receiver.
In order to use this function, it is necessary toconnect external voltage connector of the R7008SB
receiver to a CA-RVIN-700 or SBS-01V to thebattery you desire to measure the voltage of the
EXT-battery.

*CA-RVIN-700 must be installed in the aircraft.
You will be alerted by an alarm or vibration if
the voltage set by you is exceeded.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

ŏ Tap the [Receiver] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu
Ext. battery
voltageMax. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↓ The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound whenthe voltage drops to
below the setting.

Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Alarm set
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [4.0V] item.
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: 4.0V
Adjustment range: 0.0V~100.0V*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the H/E button.

96 ＜ Linkage menu ＞"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3

Displaying data from the temperature

Telemetry : Temperature*A temperature sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
Temperature is a screen which displays/sets*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used inup the temperature information from an optional
FASSTest12CH mode.
temperature sensor.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetry
The temperature of the model (engine, motor,
functions.
battery, etc.) which is Àying can be displayed.
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting, an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
ŏ Tap the [Temperature] button in the Telemetry
screen to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Temperature

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↑ An upward arrow
will show that an
alarm will sound when
the temperature rises
above the set value.
↓ A downward arrow
will show that an
alarm will sound when
the temperature drops
below the set value.

Sets the temperatureon which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Alert set : Temperature warning
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [℃ ] item .
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: Ń100℃ Ņ0℃
Adjustment range: -20℃ ~200℃(ŃLimit ≧ ŅLimit)"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the H/E button.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 97

Displaying data from the rpm

Telemetry : RPM Sensor
The RPM Sensor screen is used to set up an
optional rpm sensor and display the rotation
information it transmits.
The rotation of the model (engine, motor, etc.)
which is Àying can be shown.
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting, an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.

*An rpm sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

ŏ Tap the [rpm sensor] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

rpm

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↑ An upward arrow
will show that an alarm
will sound when therpm rises above the set
value.
↓ A downward arrow
will show that an alarm
will sound when therpm falls below the set
value.

Sets the rpm on which
the alarm operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

"Magnet""Optics""Brushless motor"

SBS-01RM → Gear ratio 1.00~99.00
SBS-01RO → Blade
2~10
SBS-01RB → Pole
2~30

Alarm set : Over (Under) rotations
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [xxx rpm] item .
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: Ń 2,000rpm Ņ 0rpm
Adjustment range: 0rpm~150,000rpm(ŃLimit ≧ ŅLimit)*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the H/E button.

98 ＜ Linkage menu ＞"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3

Displaying data from the altitude

Telemetry : Altitude*An altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

Altitude is a screen which displays / sets up the altitude
information from an optional altitude sensor or GPS sensor.
The altitude of the model which is Àying can be known. If it
becomes higher (low) than preset altitude, you can be told by
alarm. Warning by vibration can also be chosen. Data whena power supply is turned on shall be 0 m, and it displays thealtitude which changed from there. Even if the altitude of an
air¿eld is high, that shall be 0 m and the altitude difference
from an airfield is displayed. This sensor calculates thealtitude from atmospheric pressure. Atmospheric pressure
will get lower as you go up in altitude. Using this, thesensor will estimate the altitude. Please understand that anexact advanced display cannot be performed if atmosphericpressure changes in a weather situation.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

ŏ Tap the [Altitude] button in the Telemetry screen tocall the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Altitude

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Sets the altitude
on which the alarm
operates.

↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thealtitude reaches above
your set value.

● If this is set to Mode1-4,
a rise and dive are told
by a diﬀerent melody.

↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thealtitude reaches below
your set value.

Mode1: Little rise/dive→ Melody changes: sensitively

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Mode4: Big rise/dive→ Melody changes: insensible
Allows Melody to beturned ON or OFF.

First, the set of a reference is required.

Alarm set : Altitude

1. The model and transmitter to which thealtitude sensor was connected are turned on.
2. Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference" item.

1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [xxx m] item .
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: Ń200m Ņ-50m
Adjustment range -500m~+3,000m(ŃLimit ≧ ŅLimit)*Atmospheric pressure is changed according to the weather
also at the same air¿eld. You should preset before a Àight.

"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.

Type 3

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the H/E button.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 99

Displaying data from thevariometer

Telemetry : Altitude [Variometer]*An altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
VARIO is a screen which displays / sets up thestatus, the FX-36 incorporates a different melody
variometer information from an optional altitude
for ascent and descent. Additionally, depending
sensor or GPS sensor.
upon the rate of climb or descent, the tones vary toindicate whether or not the airplane is climbing or
The variometer of the model which is Àying candescending at a rapid rate.
be known.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting, an*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used inalarm and/or vibration will alert you.
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetry
To ensure that the pilot is aware as to the model'sŏ Tap the [Variometer] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.

functions.

ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

VariometerMax. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
Sets the variometeron which the alarm
operates.

↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thevariometer reaches
above your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thevariometer reaches
below your set value.

● If this is set to Mode1-4,
a rise and dive are told
by a diﬀerent melody.
Mode 1 : Little rise/dive→ Melody changes: sensitively

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Allows Melody to beturned ON or OFF.

First, the set of a reference is required.
1. The model and transmitter to which thealtitude sensor was connected are turned on.
2. Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference" item.
*Atmospheric pressure is changed according to the weather
also at the same air¿eld. You should preset before a Àight.

"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1Mode 4 : Big rise/dive→ Melody changes: insensible

Alert set : variometer
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [m/s] item .
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: +1m
Adjustment range-50m/s~+50m/s(ŃLimit ≧ ŅLimit)

Type 2*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.

Type 3

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the H/E button.

100 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Vario Melody Setting

Tap the [Set] button

Current variometer*These settings can bemade for each sensor.

Next page

Deadband

Range

When the variometer is greaterthan this value, Vario melody is
not variable.
Setting range：
Offset value 〜 +50m/s
Initial value：5.0m/s

When the variometer is less than
this value, Vario melody is notvariable.
Setting range：-50m/s 〜 Offset value
Initial value：-5.0m/s

When the variometer is lessthan this value, Vario melody
is not output.
Setting range：0m/s 〜 +50m/s
Initial value：0.0m/s

When the variometer isgreater than this value, Vario
melody is not
output.
Setting range：-50m/s 〜 0m/s
Initial value：0.0m/s

OﬀsetžŷƋƈŃƕƈƏƄƗƌƒƑŃƒƉŃŹƄƕƌƒŃŰƈƏƒƇƜŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊƖƀ
Fixed melody
Range↑
Deadband↑Oﬀset

This is the changing point of climb and sink. When the variometeris greater than this value, Vario Melody is climb type. When thevariometer is less than this value, Vario Melody is sink type.
Setting range：Range Ń setting value 〜 Range Ņ setting value
Initial value：0.0m/s

Deadband↓Variable melody
Dead band（Not sound）

Variable melody

Range↓

Climb side
Discontinuous
soundsSink side
Continuous
soundsFixed melody＜ Linkage menu ＞ 101

DelayThe output vario melody does not change during
the delay time. In other words, this is a minimum
time of Vario melody output.
Setting range：0.0 s，0.5 s，1.0 s，1.5 s
Initial value：0.0 s*This parameter is effective to all variometers.

žŹƄƕƌƒŃŰƈƏƒƇƜŃŧƈƏƄƜƀ
Actually Variometer
0.0m/s

1.0m/s

3.0m/s

4.0m/s

2.0m/s-1.0m/s

Output Vario Melody
0.0m/s

1.0m/sDelay time
1.0s

102 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

3.0m/s

4.0m/s

2.0m/s-1.0m/sDisplaying data from the receiver battery voltage

Telemetry: Voltage [Battery]*SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.
In this screen, the battery voltage of a receiver isdisplayed.
If it becomes higher or lower than the settin, an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.

In this screen, the battery voltage is displayed.
In order to use this function, it is necessary toconnect External voltage connector of R7008SB ⇔SBS-01V ⇔ Battery
SBS-01V measures two batteries. The power
battery connected to two lines is displayed on EXTVOLT. The battery for receivers connected to 3Plines is displayed here.
ŏ Tap the [Voltage] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Battery voltage

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↓ The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound whenthe voltage drops to
below the setting.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.
Vibrator choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.

＜ Two examples of wiring are shown ＞
Two drive batteries are measured (R7008SB use)

Alarm set
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er,
Voice, and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using
the vibrator alarm. If using vibrator,choose one of the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [4.0V] item .
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ""ʆʆ" buttons.
Initial value: 4.0V
Adjustment range: 0.0V~100.0V*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the H/E button.

Drive battery 1（EXT Battery)WR6%86
SRUW

Drive battery 2（EXT Battery)

EXT Line

Normal Line56%

Receiver battery●Battery voltage measurement for receivers [R7008SB use]
●The drive battery 1 is measured in an EXT port [R7008SB use]
●The drive battery 2 is measured in an EXT line [SBS-01V use]

Two drive batteries and power supplies for servos are measured (R7008SB use)
Drive battery 1（EXT Battery)
Drive battery 2（EXT Battery)
Power supplies
for servos*SBS-01V measures two voltage. One corresponds to high voltages, such as a drive battery,with an EXT line. Another is a normal line and is measurement of the battery for receivers of aline connected to 3P connector, or the battery for servos.

EXT Line

6ZLWFK

Normal LineWR6%86SRUW$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\+XE

56%

Receiver battery*Refer to the manual of SBS-01V for the details of
wiring.

S.BUS2

servos●Battery voltage measurement for receivers [R7008SB use]
●The drive battery 1 is measured in an EXT port [R7008SB use]
●The drive battery 2 is measured in an EXT line [SBS-01V use]
●The voltage for servos is measured in a power supply line [SBS-01V use]

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 103

D i s pl a y i n g d a t a f r o m t h e E XT
battery voltage port

Telemetry: Voltage [Ext. battery]In this screen, the EXT battery voltage isdisplayed. In order to use this function, it isnecessary to connect External voltage connector of
R7008SB ⇔ SBS-01V ⇔ Battery
SBS-01V measures two batteries. The power
battery connected to two lines is displayed on EXTVOLT.

*SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

ŏ Tap the [Voltage] button in the Telemetry screen tocall the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu
Ext. battery
voltageMax. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↓ The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound whenthe voltage drops to
below the setting.

Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Alarm set
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap Limit [4.0V].
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: 4.0V
Adjustment range: 0.0V~100.0V*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset tothe initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the H/E button.

104 ＜ Linkage menu ＞"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3

Displaying data from the Distance Screen

Telemetry : GPS [Distance]
The Distance screen displays and sets altitude
data from an SBS-01/02G GPS Sensor (soldseparately), and allows the distance to the airborne
aircraft to be read by the transmitter. When theaircraft flies inside or outside the set distance, an
alarm and vibration alerts the pilot.

*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
*The GPS sensor is necessary, and is sold separately. Mountand connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor
instruction manual.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

ŏ Tap the [GPS] button in the Telemetry screen to callthe setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu
Distance
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
distance reaches
above your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
distance reaches
below your set value.

Sets the distanceon which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference"
item. Sets the current aircraft position
as the starting point.

"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2

Altitude calculated as either straight line distance(slant) or surface distance on a map can also be
selected.

nt

Sla

AltitudeType 3

Surface
Select <Slant> <Surface> to "Distance mode", tap thescreen.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 105

First, the set of a reference is required.

Setting a "too close" alarm distance

1. The model and transmitter to which the GPS
sensor was connected are turned on.

1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice,and Inhibit.

2. Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference" item.

2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.

*Now, the position of the present model was set to 0 m.

Setting a "too far" alarm distance
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.

3. Tap Limit [m].
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: 0m
Adjustment range 0m~3,000m(ŃLimit ≧ ŅLimit)

3. Tap Limit [m].
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.

*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset tothe initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the H/E button.

Initial value: 1,000m
Adjustment range 0m~3,000m(ŃLimit ≧ ŅLimit)*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset tothe initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the H/E button.

TelemetryDataŧƌƖƗƄƑƆƈ
*Positioning time of GPS
When powered up, the SBS-01/02G begins toacquire GPS satellite data. This process cantake several minutes. Please do not move themodel during this process. During acquisition,
the LED on the SBS-01/02G will blink green;
after the satellite's signals have been acquired,
the LED will become solid green, and the GPS
signal strength display on the transmitter willshow three bars.
Moving the model before the satellites are fullyacquired will cause a delay in acquiring thesatellite signal.

106 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Displaying data from the speed

Telemetry : GPS [Speed]

The speed screen displays and sets the speed data from an *A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

SBS-01/02G (GPS sensor) sold separately.
The speed of the aircraft during Àight can be displayed.
After flight, the maximum speed during flight can beviewed. Because this speed is based on position data froma GPS satellite, the ground speed is displayed instead of
air speed. Consequently, with a head wind, the displayed
speed decreases and with a tail wind, the displayed speed
increases.

*The GPS sensor is necessary, and is sold separately. Mountand connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor
instruction manual.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

ŏ Tap the [GPS] button in the Telemetry screen to callthe setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Speed↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
speed reaches above
your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
speed reaches below
your set value.

Sets the speed on
which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Reference and Distance mode work in conjunction
with Distance discussed on the previous two pages.

"Vibrator" type
Alarm setting when speed increases
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice, andInhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using the vibrator
alarm. If using vibrator, choose one of the three
types.
3. Tap Limit [xxx km/h].
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: Ń200km/h Ņ0km/h
Adjustment range 0km/h~500km/h(ŃLimit ≧ ŅLimit)*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.
5. To terminate the input and return to the originalstate, push the H/E button.

If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3*Speed alarm precaution
Since the GPS speed sensor displays the ground speed, itcannot be used as a stall alarm. For example, an aircraft thatstalls at 50km/h will stall if the tailwind is 5km/h or greater
even through 55km/h is displayed by ground speed. In
addition, with an aircraft that will disintegrate in midÀight at
400km/h at an over-speed alarm, when the headwind reaches
30km/h the airplane will disintegrate in midair due to overspeeding even at a ground speed of 370km/h.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 107

Telemetry : GPS [Altitude, Variometer, Position]*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
The Altitude, Variometer, Position screen
displays and sets the data from an SBS-01/02G(GPS sensor) sold separately.
*The GPS sensor is necessary, and is sold separately. Mountand connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor
instruction manual.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

ŏ Select [GPS] in the Telemetry screen andaccess the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Altitude
Variometer

Refer to the former
page for a setup
about Altitude andVariometer.

This indicates thereceiving accuracy
from a GPS Satellite.
When three bars are
displayed, the GPS isready for use.

The position of the present
model is displayed.

ŤƏƗƌƗƘƇƈ
ŹƄƕƌƒƐƈƗƈƕ

ƓƒƖƌƗƌƒƑ

108 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Telemetry : Servo sensor [Current]
The SBS-01S can monitor and display thein-flight current, operating angle, and internal
temperature of up to two S.BUS2 servos.
If you forget to connect the servo wiring during
fuselage assembly, or the servo was disconnected,
an alarm can be activated at the transmitter.

*Servo sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

Tap here and go to theServo 2 settings page.
(Display and settingscontent is the same as
Servo 1.)

ŏ Select [Servo sensor] in the Telemetry
screen and access the setup screen
shown below.
ŏReturn to Linkage menu
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Tapping this willtake you to thesettings screen forthe current alarm

Tapping this and selecting"Buzzer" will cause the device
to sound an alarm when
servos are not connected.

Tapping this and selecting"Each type" will cause thedevice to vibrate when servos
are not connected.

When the Alarm or
Vibrator options areactivated, the servo
connection will
display.
*This alarm and display is limited to the S.BUS
servos connected to the servo sensors.
↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thecurrent reaches above
your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thecurrent reaches below
your set value.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Sets the current on
which the alarm
operates.

Vibrator is choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.

Initial value: ↑ 10.0A ↓ 0.0A
Adjustment range 0.0A~10.0A( ↑ Limit ≧ ↓ Limit)＜ Linkage menu ＞ 109

Telemetry : Servo sensor [Temperature] [Angle]*Servo sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
ŏ Select [Servo sensor] in the Telemetry
screen and access the setup screen
shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

● Temperature↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thetemperature reaches
above your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thetemperature reaches
below your set value.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Sets the temperatureon which the alarm
operates.

Vibrator choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.

Initial value: ↑ 115℃↓ -10℃
Adjustment range -10℃ ~115℃( ↑ Limit ≧ ↓ Limit)● Angle↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when theangle reaches above
your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when theangle reaches below
your set value.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

110 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Sets the angle onwhich the alarm
operates.

Vibrator choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.

Initial value: ↑ +180.0° ↓ -180.0°
Adjustment range -180.0° ~ +180.0°( ↑ Limit ≧ ↓ Limit)

Telemetry : Current sensor [Current]
The SBS-01C has the capability of measuring
current, voltage and capacity (consumption) fromdrive battery all at the same time.

*Current sensor must be installed in theaircraft.

'ULYH

(6&

%DWWHU\

0RWRU
WR5HFHLYHU

6%6&ŏ Select [Current] in the Telemetry screen andaccess the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Tapping this will take you tothe settings screen for thecurrent alarm

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Tapping this will take you tothe settings screen for thevoltage alarm
Tapping this will take you tothe settings screen for the
consumption capacity alarm
The consumption capacity is indicated.
It isn't the present battery capacity.

◆ Alarm setting↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thecurrent reaches above
your set value.

Sets the current on
which the alarm
operates.

↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thecurrent reaches below
your set value.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

"Vibrator" type
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.

If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3＜ Linkage menu ＞ 111

Tele. setting

Speech interval set , data logging of telemetry.

Set the speech interval of telemetry data, and thelogging of telemetry data to an SD card at chosenintervals.
Telemetry data can be checked on your PC aftera Àight.
ŏ Tap the [Tele.setting] button in the Linkage menu
to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Sets the speech interval
Initial value: 0 sec.
Adjustment range 0-30 sec.

Telemetry data log function
Telemetry data has been adapted to the log function which is recorded at the SD card.
【Setting method】① Open the linkage menu Tele. setting screen.
② Log recording can be started and stopped by operating a switch. The Logging switch is selected.
③ The log output interval can be set.
* The data to be recorded is updated at the time set by Linkage menu → System Type screen D/L interval. For
example, when the log output interval is 1 second and the D/L interval is 2 seconds the same data is overlapped andrecorded twice.
【Operation method】① Insert the SD card into the card slot.
② Set the switch set by Log Start/Stop Switch to ON. A beep sounds and a log ﬁle is created and recording of thetelemetry data begins.

Absolutely never remove the SD card while log data is being recorded.
③ Set the switch set by Logging switch to OFF. A beeping sound is generated and recording of the telemetry data stops.
④ Turn off the transmitter power and remove the SD card.
■ Log ﬁleA log ﬁle is created in the SD card LOG folder. Two ﬁles with the same ﬁlename, but a different extension are created.
(Example: 00001234.FLI, 00001234.FLD)■ Extension FLI: Slot allocation information ﬁle■ Extension FLD: Log data ﬁle*When copying or moving a log ﬁle, always select both the .FLI ﬁle and .FLD ﬁle.
Log ﬁles can be converted to CSV format by using the telemetry log converter available at the Futaba website.
■ Notes◇ Altimeter altitude data and GPS distance and altitude data output with the point that time logging started as thereference (0m). When the transmitter preset position and the log start position are different, the transmitter display
and the log data display will also be different. The altitude and distance from the take-off position can be recorded bystarting logging immediately after take-off.
◇ The transmitter gear ratio or number of ﬁns setting is not reﬂected in the speedometer log data (speed). Multiply thegear ratio or number of ﬁns by the speed data.
◇ When the SD card becomes full, recording stops and does not resume even if logging is restarted.

112 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Telemetry Alarm Duration and Repeat time
The repeat time and duration time for the telemetry alarm (buzzer, vibration and speech) can be set.

ŏ Tap the [Telemetry Setting] button in the Linkagemenu to call the setup screen shown below.

Duration is not displayed when
Repeat is INH.

Duration
It is an alarm output time.
Setting range：1 s 〜 30 s
Initial value：INH

Repeat
It is a repeat time of an alarm
output.
Setting range：INH，1 s 〜 240 s
Initial value：INH

Duration value has to be less than
repeat value.
Duration time is extended when theother alarm event occurs.

žŧƘƕƄƗƌƒƑŃƄƑƇŃŵƈƓƈƄƗŃƗƌƐƈŃƉƒƕŃŷƈƏƈƐƈƗƕƜŃŤƏƄƕƐƀ
e.g. Repeat time is 8 seconds and Duration time is 5 seconds.
Repeat time 8s
Alarm
output

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Duration time 5s＜ Linkage menu ＞ 113

Trainer system starting and setting

Trainer

FX-36 trainer system makes it possible for the
instructor to choose which channels and operation
modes can be used in the student's transmitter.
The function and rate of each channel can be set.
The training method can also be matched to thestudent's skill level. Two transmitters must beconnected by an optional Trainer Cord, and theInstructor's transmitter should be programmed fortrainer operation, as described below.
When the Instructor activates the trainer switch,
the student has control of the aircraft (if MIX/FUNC/NORM mode is turned on, the Instructor
can make corrections while the student has control).
When the switch is released the Instructor regains
control. This is very useful if the student gets theaircraft into an undesirable situation.
ŏ Setting data are stored to model data.
ŏ Student rate can be adjusted at MIX/F8NC/
NORM mode.
ŏ Activated student channels can be selectedby switches.

Note: This trainer system can be used in the following
manner:1. With the FX-36 transmitter and a conventionaltransmitter, if the channel order is different, it isnecessary to match the channel order before using thisfunction.
You can select the channel of input data from student's
transmitter in the "FUNC" or "MIX" mode.
2. When the FX-36 is used as the instructor’s transmitter,
set the modulation mode of the student’s transmitter to
PPM.
If being used as the student, FX-36 can be connected tothe instructor's transmitter which requires the student's
mode to be PPM. FX-36 always sends PPM mode signal
from the trainer jack.
(In the case of student's transmitters other than 2.4 GHz)
3. Be sure that all channels work correctly in bothtransmitters before Àying.

Corresponding types of transmitters and trainer mode settings:
Types of transmitters

Instructor s transmitter settings
System Type
Trainer setting
Mod. mode
CH modeStudent s transmitter settings
System Type
Trainer setting
Mod. mode
CH modeMod. mode

Trainer Cords

Instructor

Student

FX-36,FX-32
T14SG,T16S=,T18S=
T18M=

FX-36,FX-32
T14SG,T16S=,T18S=
T18M=

Arbitrary

FX-36

T14M=, FX-40, T12=,
T12FG,
FX-30

Arbitrary

12CH

PCM-G3
2.4G

12CH

PPM

FX-36

T8FG, FX-20

Arbitrary

12CH
8CH

FASST-MLT2
FASST-M8LT--

T10C, T9C,
T7C,T6EX, T4EX
T10CG,T7C

Arbitrary

8CH

PPM

-

-

T12FG (F8TM4405)

Arbitrary

8CH

Arbitrary--

T12FG (F8TM4405)

T10-, T8-, T6., T6-,
T6L

Arbitrary

8CH

Arbitrary

-

-

FX-36

Arbitrary

12CH

Arbitrary

12CH

-

FX-36

Arbitrary

12CH

Arbitrary

12CH

-

FX-36

Arbitrary-

Arbitrary

8CH

-

FX-36
FX-36
FX-36
T14M=, FX-40, T12=,
T12FG,
FX-30
T8FG, FX-20
T10C, T10CG, T10-,
T9C, T7C
T7C, T8-, T6.
T6-

114 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

16CH

Arbitrary

16CH

T12FG (F8TM4405)
and 9C (F8TM4415)
Trainer Cords

T12FG (F8TM4405)
and 9C (F8TM4415)
Trainer Cords

ŏ Tap the [Trainer] button in the Linkage menu to callthe setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Linkage menu

When using at the student side

When using at the teacher side

1. Select the mode.

1. Select the mode.

*When changing the mode, tap to the item you want tochange and change the mode using the "źź" "ź" "Ÿ""ŸŸ" buttons. The display blinks. Tap the screen to change
the mode.

*When changing the mode, tap to the item you want tochange and change the mode using the "źź" "ź" "Ÿ""ŸŸ" buttons. The display blinks. Tap the screen to change
the mode.

"Teacher/Student": Select [Student].
"ACT/INH": Enable operation by changing to[ACT].
"16/12/8 CH": When the student uses the FX36,T14SG,T18S=,T16S=,T18M=, select [16CH].
When the student uses the T14M=, T12=, T12FG
or FX-40, select [12CH]. Otherwise select[8CH].

"Teacher/Student": Select [Teacher].
"ACT/INH": Enable operation by changing to[OFF] or [ON].
"16/12/8 CHANNEL": When the student uses
the FX-36 (including the T18M=,T18S=,T16S=,
T14SG) select [16CH]. Otherwise select [12CH]
or[8CH].

Note: In "student mode", only the teacherside can turn on and off the power to thestudent s transmitter. .eep the power switch
always at off position.

2. Select the trainer switch.
*When setting or changing the switch, tap to the "SWITCH"
item, call the switch setup screen and set the desired switch
and ON/OFF direction.

(See "Switch selection method" at the end of thismanual for selection method details.)*The switch mode can also be selected when setting the
ON position on the switch setup screen. When [Normal] isselected, normal ON/OFF operation is performed. When
[Alternate] is selected, the trainer function is alternately
turned on and off each time the switch is operated. This
allows alternate ON/OFF switching even when a momentary
switch (SH) is used.

Note: The trainer function won·t be turnedon unless the Instructor s transmitter receives
signals from the student s transmitter. Be
sure to confirm this after connecting yourtrainer cable.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 115

3. Select the operating mode for each channel.

Trainer student channel setting function
In training mode, the instructor's transmitter canpick up the student's signal on both the "Function"and "Mix" channels. That makes it easy for thetwo transmitters to connect even if the student andinstructor have set up their transmitters differently.
*When the instructor's transmitter mode is set to "NORM",
the signal of the same channel of the student's transmitter is
output as is. (The same as before.)"NORM": The model is controlled by signals
from the student transmitter.
"MIX" mode: The model is controlled bysignals from the teacher and student
transmitters. (Reset the student s model data
to the default condition.)"F8NC" mode (function mode):
The model is controlled by signals fromthe student transmitter with the teacher
AFR setting. (Reset the student s model data
to the default condition.)"OFF": Only the teacher side operates.
*The setting above allows setting of the servo throw relative
to the amount of student side operation when [MIX] or[FUNC] was selected.

When changing the rate, use the "ʈʈ" "ʈ""ʆ" "ʆʆ" button to Tap the [Rate] item of
the channel.
Setting range: -100~+100
Initial value: +100
*When the value is tapped, the rate is reset to the initial value.

4. Set the switch of each channel.
*When setting the switch at each channel, tap to the "SW"item of the channel you want to change, call the switch
setup screen, and select the switch.

"--" : Always ON.
"SA"~"SH": The switch which enables student
side operation can be selected. (See "Switch
selection method" at the end of this manual
for selection method details.)

116 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Mixing warning normal reset

Warning setting
The warning display at power ON can be turned
ON/OFF for each function. Use by setting functions
which may be dangerous if operated at power ON
to ON. Initial setting is all ON (Buzzer).

ŏ Tap the [Warning setting] button in the
Linkage menu to call the setup screen
shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

The settings can be changed
individually. When set to[Inhibit], a warning is not
displayed at power ON.

"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3WARNING
It is extremely dangerous tounnecessarily inhibit essential
warnings.
■Careless spinning of propellers or rotors poses a
danger of serious injury or death.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 117

Original menu screen making

User menu setting
FX-36 has a menu for each of the following:
System, Linkage, and Model. Also, you cancreate a personalized User menu that can include
all of the menus that you use most often.

*Any change made to data entered from the User menu orfrom the normal method of use are the same. Changes madein either way are saved into the transmitter memory.

ŏ Tap the [8ser menu setting] button in the
Linkage menu to call the setup screen
shown below.
ŏReturn to Linkage menu

Tap here to selectyour ﬁrst choice.

Once pressed, 3 pages of choices will be displayed.

When "---" is chosen,
it can be deleted.

Make your selection, press your choice and theﬁrst of your "User menu" will be entered.

How to call a User menu
1. From the home screen, press the 8/M button.

From the home
screenHOME
screenPress the U/M

118 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Function can becalled by a tap

Data reset

Model memory setting data reset. (by item)

This function is designed to allow you to reset
selected portions or all of the settings saved in
the active model memory. You may individuallychoose to reset the following sets of data:
Trim (All condition):

Model menu setting:Resets all the functions in the Model menu
except condition select.
All model setting:Reset the digital trim setting.

Resets all Linkage and Model menu functions
except for frequency, model select, and model type.

*All the conditions, or the condition currently being displayed(the entire group for group setting), can be selected.
*The trim step amount and trim rate are not reset.

Function Name:

Trim (Current and Group condition):A function name is reset.
Telemetry:

Reset the digital trim setting.

Reset the telemetry setting.

*Current condition, group condition, can be selected.
*The trim step amount and trim rate are not reset.

ŏ Select [Data reset] at the linkage menu and callthe setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Linkage menu

Data resetting method
1. Tap to the item you want to reset and tap
the screen.
*A con¿rmation message appears.

2. Execute reset by tapping the "Yes".

[Trim (All condition)]: Resets only the Trim (allconditions)[Trim(Current and Group condition)]: Resets
only the data of Trim (condition in use and all
the conditions set to group mode)[Model menu setting]: Resets all the functionsin the model menu, except the condition
selection functions.
[All model setting]: Resets all the functions in
the linkage menu and model menu except
the freTuency, model select, and modeltype functions.
[Function name]: Resets only the function
name functions.
[Telemetry]: Resets only the teremetryfunctions.

CAUTIONCAUTION

Never engage the Data reset function
while the engine is starting or the
motor drive wiring is connected.

Throttle Reverse■ Sudden, abrupt spinning of propellers or rotors
is extremely dangerous.

■ Only the throttle channel (CH3) initial setting is
REV (reverse). Thoroughly check the Hi and Low
directions of the engine or motor used and be
careful that they do not suddenly run at fullspeed. Even after data reset, CH3 is reversed.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 119

MODEL MENU (Common functions)This section describes the AFR, program mixing,
and other functions common to all model types.
Before setting the model data, use the Model
Type function of the Linkage menu to select themodel type matched to the fuselage. When anothermodel type is selected thereafter, the AFR, program
mixing, and other setting data are reset.
The functions in the Model menu can be set foreach flight condition. When you want to use thesystem by switching the settings for each conditionby switch, stick position, etc., use the Condition

Select function to add flight conditions. (Up to 8
conditions can be used)
Note: The FX-36 is designed so that the airplane andglider model types are compatible with aircraft ofsimilar type wings.
This section outlines the relationship between thefunctions common to airplanes and gliders, except
some dedicated functions, and model type.
The setting items depend on the number of servos
and other differences according to the wing typeused, but reread them. The setup screens in the
instruction manual are typical examples.

Tap this icon to
go to the modelmenu.

ŏ Select the function
name and return to
the Home screen.

(Model menu screen example)*The Model menu screen
depends on the model type.

ŰƒƇƈƏŃƐƈƑƘŃŋŦƒƐƐƒƑŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŌŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŃƗƄƅƏƈ
[Servo monitor]: Displays the servo test and operation positionĺLinkage menu referring[Condition select]: Flight conditions addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming, and condition delay canbe set.
[AFR]: Sets the angle and curve of all the operation functions.
[Dual rate]: D/R curve which can be switched with a switch, etc. can also be added.
[Program. mixes]: Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10 mixes can be used for eachcondition.

120 ＜ Model menu (Common Functions) ＞

Condition selectFlight condition's addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming,and condition delay can be set. [All model types]

The functions in the Model menu can be used byswitching the settings of up to 8 flight conditions
by using the Condition select function to add Àight
conditions. Add conditions, as required.
When you do not want to use the Condition
select function, this setting is unnecessary. In thiscase, use the flight conditions assigned at initial
setting.
ŏ Since switching by stick and lever position, in
addition to ordinary toggle switch, is possible
as the flight condition selector switch, thisfunction can be linked with other operations.
ŏ A Condition Delay function can be set.
Unnecessary fuselage motion generated

when there are sudden changes in the servo
positions and when there are variations in
the operating time between channels duringcondition switching can be suppressed. The
delay can be set for each channel.
When setting the delay function at theswitching destination condition, therelated function changes after a delay
corresponding to the set amount.
ŏ When multiple conditions were set, theiroperation priority can be freely changed.
ŏ The condition name can be changed. The
selected condition name is displayed on
the screen. When a condition has been
added, give it a name which can be easilyconÀrmed.

ŏ Select [Condition select] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
Currently selected condition name

Conditions List

Condition Renaming

Condition Addition

1. Select the condition bytapping the condition you
want to rename in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Rename] button.
3. Enter the new name from the
keyboard which appears on
the screen.
4. When the keyboard [Condition
name] key is tapped, the newname is registered.

1. When the [Add] button is tapped, theCondition Select screen appears.
*Only the number of buttons corresponding to theconditions which can be added are displayed.
2. Select the desired conditions by tapping
the buttons.
*The selected conditions are added to Conditions
List.
3. Tap the [--] button to call the Switch!
screen.
4. Select the switch to be used in condition
switching.
(See "Switch selection method" at the endof this manual for selection method
details.)
5. The "Condition1" data for the added
conditions is copied.

＜ Model menu (Common Functions) ＞ 121

Currently selected condition name

The ON/OFF switch ofcondition is chosen.

Conditions List

Condition Copy

Condition Remove

1. Tap the [Copy] button. The Copy screen
appears.
2. Select the condition by tapping the buttonof the copy source conditions.
3. Next, select the condition by tapping the
copy destination condition.
4. Tap the [Copy] button.
5. When the [Yes] button is tapped, the datais copied. (To abort copying, tap the [No]button.)1. Select the condition bytapping the condition you
want to reset in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Remove] button.
3. When the [Yes] button istapped, the condition isreset. (To abort resetting, tap
the [No] button.)

Last condition has
the highest priority● Group/single mode switching (Gr./Sngl)(For a description of the operation
method, see the description at theback of this manual.)

Priority change
1. Tap the condition whose
priority you want to change
in Conditions List.
2. Change the priority with thepriority [ ] or [ ] button. (Thelast condition has the highest
priority.)*The initial setting condition
cannot be moved. It has thelowest priority.

Condition delay setting
1. Switch to the condition you want to set.
2. Tap the Delay button of the channel you
want to set.
3. Use the value input buttons to set the delay.
ŏInitial value: 0ŏAdjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)

122 ＜ Model menu (Common Functions) ＞

AFR

The angle and curve of each operation function can be set. [All model types]

AFR function is used to adjust the throw andoperation curve of the stick, lever, and switch
functions for each Àight condition.

Rate

100%

Rate

40%

When D/R is turned ON, the display willshow "D/R----", and the rudder angle (rate)and EXP can be set when D/R is ON.

This is normally used after End Point has de¿ned
the maximum throw. When mixing is applied fromone channel to another channel, both channels
can be adjusted at the same time by adjusting theoperation rate through the AFR function.
ŏ Operation curve adjustment: Three typesof curves (EXP1, EXP2, and Point) can beselected. A maximum 17 points curve can beused for the point curve type. (Initial setting:
9 points) The number of points can also be
increased and decreased and curves fromcomplex curves to simple curves can beused.
ŏ Operation speed adjustment: The operation
speed of each function when the function
is operated (including at flight condition
switching) can be adjusted. The function
operates smoothly at a constant speed
corresponding to the set speed.

ŏ Select [AFR] at the model menu and callthe setup screen shown below.
Curve select
EXP1, EXP2, Point curveŏReturn to Model menu

Curve selectSeparately ⇔ Combination(Left and rightsymmetricalcurve.)
Left/right, Up/down, overall
adjustment at Rate A andRate B● Operation curve setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)

Function selection
1. When the function select button is tapped, a selection screen appears.
2. Select the function you want to set at the selection screen.

● Group/single mode switch (Gr./Sngl)(For more information, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)● Servo speed setting(For a description of the setting
method, see the description at
the back of this manual.)＜ Model menu (Common Functions) ＞ 123

Dual rate

100%

D/R curves which can be switched by switch,etc. can be added. The curve can be adjusted by the
AFR function.
ŏ Up to 6 rates can be added for eachcondition.
ŏ D/R is set for each condition and is notreÁected at other conditions.
ŏ D/R at the top of the D/R list has priority.

40%

ŏ Select [Dual rate] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Model menu
The ON/OFF switch ofdual rate is chosen.

Activate the D/R function
by tapping the [INH] .

Rate, EXP settings
are on AFR function

When the function select button
is tapped, a selection screen
appears.
Select the function you want to
set at the selection screen.

● Setting rudder angle, EXP
On this D/R screen you can set functions andswitchover switches. Rudder angle (rate) and EXP
settings are performed on the AFR screen when
the D/R switch is ON.

124 ＜ Model menu (Common Functions) ＞

Program. mixes

Program mixing which can be freely customi]ed. Up to 10
mixings can be used for each condition. [All model types]

Programmable mixing may be used to correctundesired tendencies of the aircraft, and it may also
be used for unusual control con¿gurations. Mixing
means that the motion of a command channel,
called the "master," is added to the motion of themixed channel, called "slave."
You may choose to have the Masters trim
added to the Slave channel response, if you desire("Trim" setting). The mixing curve can be changed
so that the undesired tendencies can be corrected
effectively by setting the EXP1/EXP2/Point modes.

Offset-type mixing applies a fixed offset orpreset to the programmed channel servo operationand may control up to four circuits simultaneously.
The Programmable mixing includes a powerfullink function, which allows Programmable mixing
to be linked with the special mixing functions, orwith other programmable mixing functions. The
link function can be set up for Master and Slave
channel individually.

ŏ Tap the [Prog. mixes] button in the Model menu to callthe setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Model menu
● Group/single modeswitch (Gr./Sngl)(For more information,
see the description
at the back of thismanual.)After this function is
activated, the masterand slave function
names (or oﬀset mixing)
are displayed.

Mixing/Oﬀset modeswitch● Operation curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the back ofthis manual.)

Activate the function bytapping the [INH] .
The ON/OFF switch ofprog. mixes is chosen.
Master function(or Stick, Switch, Dial)
is chosen.
Slave function is chosen.
Servo speed setting

Trim mode setting ON/OFF.

Fine tuning trim
setting

The on time (start/stoptime) can be set up to 4
seconds. It is useful for
landing gear control of thejet or scale plane, etc.

＜ Model menu (Common Functions) ＞ 125

Setting methodsŏGroup/single mode selection
Activating functions for only the selectedconditions:
1. Tap the [Gr] button and switch to the [Sngl ]mode.
*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between the Gr
and Sngl modes.

ŏMixing mode selection
Using the offset mode:
1. Tap the Mode button and switch to theOffset mode.
*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between the
Mixing and Offset modes.

ŏTrim mode ON/OFF setting
1. To turn the trim mode ON/OFF, tap the Trim
button on the screen.
*When mixing includes master side trim, set the Trim button
to [ON]. When mixing does not include master side trim, set
the Trim button to [OFF].
*Each time this button is pressed, it toggles between [ON]and [OFF].
*This is effective when the master channel is set by Function.

ŏMixing curve type selection
1. Tap the curve type selection button of thecurve type you want to use to display theselection screen. Then, select the curve youwant to use.
*For a description of the curve setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

ŏMixing setup screen selection
1. Tap the button of the mixing you want to
set. The mixing setup screen is displayed.
Activate the function.
2. Activate the function by tapping the [INH]button.

ŏFine tuning trim setting
1. When using the curve fine tuning function,
tap the [--] button of the Fine Tuning item tocall the Switch! screen and then select thelever, VR, etc. you want to use.

*Each time this button is tapped, it toggles between [INH]and [ON/OFF].

*For a description of the ¿ne tuning trim setting method, see
the description at the back of this manual.

ŏMixing ON/OFF switch setting and ON/OFF
direction switchingŏServo speed setting
1. When setting the servo speed, tap the speed
button. The Servo speed setup screen isdisplayed.

*An ON/OFF switch is not set even when the function is
activated.

1. When you want to turn mixing ON/OFF byswitch, tap the [--] button to call the Switch!
screen and then select the switch and its ON
direction.
*For a description of the selection method, see [Switch
setting method] at the back of this manual.

ŏMaster channel setting (except offset typemixing)1. Tap the Master button to call the Function
menu and select the master channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the"Link" button.
*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between mixing
direction + and - and "OFF" (no link).
*Master channel control can be set to stick, VR, and othersimple travels which do not include End point, AFR, D/R,
mixing setting, etc. In this case, display the <Function,H/
W> screen by tapping the [Stick, Switch, Dial] button andthen select master channel side control.

ŏSlave channel setting
1. Tap the Slave button to call the Function
menu and select the slave channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the"Link" button.
*Each time the button is pressed, it toggles between mixing
direction + and - and "OFF" (no link).

126 ＜ Model menu (Common Functions) ＞*For a description of the servo speed setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.
*Offset mixing changes the speed. Use the Speed In andSpeed Out buttons to readjust the speed.
The mixing switch can set a delay with a different rate atstarting and stopping.
*This function is inactive when a mixing switch is not set.

MODEL MENU (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter functions)
The dedicated mixes, etc. usable when airplaneor glider model type is selected are displayedin this Model menu functions section. First use
the Model type function of the Linkage menu topreset the model type, wing type, and tail typematched to the fuselage used. Other settings reset
the data used in mixing function, etc.
These dedicated mixes can be set for eachflight condition, as required. When you want to
use the system by switching the settings for eachcondition by switch or stick position, use theCondition select function to add Àight conditions.
(Up to 8 conditions can be used)
Note: The FX-36 is designed so that the airplane andglider model types can handle aircraft of the samewing type.
The functions common to airplanes and gliders,
except some dedicated functions, are summarized
without regard to the model type.
The setting items are different, depending on thenumber of servos, etc. according to the wing typeused. The setup screens in the instruction manual
are typical examples.

Tap this icon to
go to the modelmenu.

ŏ Select the function
name and return to
the Home screen.

(Model menu screen example)*The Model menu screen
depends on the model type.

ŰƒƇƈƏŃƐƈƑƘŃŋŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŒŪƏƌƇƈƕŒŰƘƏƗƌƆƒƓƗƈƕŌŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŃƗƄƅƏƈ
Aileron differentialAILĺ Brake ÀapThis function adjusts the left and right ailerons.
Roll axis correction and ¿ne tuning with a VR are also
possible. This is convenient when making settings
during Àight.
[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]

This mix operates the brake flaps in the aileronmode. It improves the operation characteristic of theroll axis. [Airplane/glider, 4 Àaps or more]

Flap setting
The flaps can be adjusted independently. For a 4
flaps model, the camber flaps can be mixed with thebrake Àaps. [Airplane/glider, 2 Àaps or more]

AIL → Camber ÀapThis mix operates the camber flaps in the aileronmode. It improves the operation characteristic of theroll axis. [Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons + 2 Àaps or more]

Aileronĺ RudderThis mix is used when you want to operate therudder at aileron operation. Banking at a shallow bankangle is possible. [Airplane/glider, general]

ElevatorĺCamberThis mix is used when you want to the mix camber
flaps with elevator operation. Lifting force can beincreased at elevators up. [Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or
more]＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 127

Camber mixing

Air brake

This mix adjusts the camber and corrects theelevators. [Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]

This function is used when airbrakes are necessary
when landing or when diving, etc. during flight.
[Airplane, general]

Airbrakeĺ ELE
This mix is used to correct operation of the airbrakes(spoilers) when landing. [Airplane/glider, general]

Camber ÀapĺELE
This mix is used to correct for attitude changes when
the camber flaps are being used. [Airplane/glider, 2ailerons + 1 Àap or more]

RudderĺAileronThis function is used to correct roll knife edge, etc.
of stunt planes. [Airplane/glider, general]

RudderĺElevator
This function is used to correct roll maneuvers, knifeedge, etc. of stunt planes. [Airplane, general]

ButterÀy (Crow)
This function is used when powerful brake operationis necessary. [Glider, 2 ailerons or more]

Trim mix 1/2
The ailerons, elevators, and flaps trim offset rate
can be called by switch or condition selection. [Glider
general]Snap rollThis function selects the snap roll switch and adjusts
the steering angle of each rudder. Servo speed can also
be adjusted. [Airplane general]

Gyro
This is a dedicated mix when a GYA Series gyro isused. [Airplane/glider/multicopter, general]

Ailevator
This function adjusts the elevators and ailerons ofmodels with elevator specifications. [Airplane/glider,elevator speci¿cations]

Acceleration
Allows a brief "overload" in response to sudden
Elevator, ElevatorĺCamber, and AilĺRudder. [Glider
general]Motor
The operation speed when the motor of F5B
and other EP gliders is started by switch can be set.
[Airplane/glider, general]

V-TailThis function adjusts the elevators and rudder ofV-tail models. [Airplane/glider, V-tail speci¿cations]

WingletThis function adjusts the left and right rudders of
winglet models. [Airplane/glider, winglet speci¿cations]

AIR BRAKERUDDER 1
Wingletat Flying wing

(

)

AIL1
(Main Aileron)

AIL 3(Chip Aileron)

FLP 3(Brake Flap)

FLP 1(Camber Flap)

V-TAILELEVATOR(RUDDER 2)

FLP 4(Brake Flap)

AIL 2(Main Aileron)

FLP 2(Camber Flap)

ELEVATOR(AILERON 5)

ELEVATOR 2(AILERON 6)

128 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

(

AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)

AILVATORRUDDER(ELEVATOR 2)

RUDDER 2
Wingletat Flying wing)

Aileron diﬀerential[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]

The left and right aileron differential can be
adjusted independently. The differential rate canalso be adjusted according to the flying state bysetting a ¿ne tuning VR.
AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)ŏ Select [Aileron differential] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 4(Chip Aileron)

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)(For more information, see
the description at the backof this manual.)

Aileron left/rightadjustment*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.

Fine tuning VR setting*The graph is operated by setting a VR, etc.

● Fine tuning VR operation curve setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)

Setting methodŏ Tap to the aileron (AIL) 1~4(2) left (or right)
setting item.
Adjust the aileron angles.
ŏ When setting the fine tuning VR, tap the "--"
item and tap the screen to call the selection
screen, and then select the Àne tuning VR.
ŏ The Àne tuning rate can be set by curve.

＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 129

Flap setting[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/
glider, 2 Áaps or more]

The up/down travel of each flap (camber flaps:
FLP1/2, brake flaps: FLP3/4) can be adjusted
independently at each servo according to the wing type.
ŏ The operation reference point of each Áap can beoffsetFLP 4(Brake Flap)

FLP 3(Brake Flap)
FLP 1(Camber Flap)

The camber Àaps of a 4-Àap model can be mixed
with the brake Àaps. (Brake FLP to camber FLP)

FLP 2
(Camber Flap)

ŏ An ON/OFF switch can be set.

ŏ Select [Flap setting] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)(For more information, see
the description at the backof this manual.)

Up side/Down side
adjustment
Operation reference
point oﬀset
Camber ﬂap setting

Brake ﬂap setting

Operation is performed via the volume
switches, etc., set for each flap control of thefunction.

The operational volume
switch is set up by "Function"

Mixing
INH ⇔ ON

Up side/Down side
adjustment

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Operation reference
point oﬀset

Brake ﬂap to Camber ﬂap setting

Setting methodŏ Tap Áap (FLP) 1~4 up or down according to
the wing type.
Adjust the travel independently.
ŏ To offset the operation reference point ofeach Áap, tap the corresponding offset item.
Use the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ" button to offset
the reference point.
ŏ When using brake FLP to camber FLP mixing,*The display screen is an
example. The actual screen
depends on the ModelType.

tap the [INH] item and tap the screen. (ON isdisplayed.)
When setting a switch, tap the [--] item of
the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen. Then, select the switch andset its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)

130 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

model type]: Airplane/
AIL → Camber ﬂap [Corresponding
glider, 2 ailerons + 2 Áaps or more

This mix operates the camber flaps (FLP1/2)
in the aileron mode. When the aileron stickis manipulated, the ailerons and camber flaps
perform aileron operation simultaneously andthe operation characteristic of the roll axis is
improved.
ŏ The aileron left/right mixing rate of each Áap servo
can be Àne-tuned.
ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
ŏ An ON/OFF switch can be set.
ŏ Linking is possible: Link this mix to other mixes.

ŏ Select [AILńCamber flap] at themodel menu and call the setup
screen shown below.

FLP 1(Camber Flap)
AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)

FLP 2(Camber Flap)
AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 4(Chip Aileron)

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu

● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Adjustment of eachﬂap servo

To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] item

Setting methodŏ Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ When setting a switch, tap the [--] item of
the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the the back of this manual.)ŏ Tap the left or right item of each Áap servo.
Adjust the mixing rate.

*When the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).

ŏ A mixing curve can be set. (1/2 page)(For a description of the mixing curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)
ŏ To set linking, tap the [Link] item.
Set it to ON and tap the screen.

＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 131

AIL → Brake ﬂap[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/
glider, 4 Áaps or more

This mix operates the brake flaps (FLP3/4)
in the aileron mode. When the aileron stickis manipulated, the aileron and brake flaps
perform the aileron operation simultaneously
and the operation characteristic of the roll axis is
improved.
ŏ The aileron left and right mixing rates can be
adjusted for each Áap servo.
ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
ŏ Mixing during Áight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ Linking can be set: Link this mix to other mixes.

ŏ Select [AILń Brake flap] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

FLP 3(Brake Flap)

FLP 4(Brake Flap)

AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)

AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 4(Chip Aileron)

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Adjustment of eachﬂap servo

To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] itemƔSetting methodŏ Tap the INH item.
(ON is displayed.)ŏ When setting a switch, tap to the [--] itemof the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the at the back of this manual.)ŏ Tap the left or right button of each Áap servo.
Adjust the mixing rate.

*When the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by reversing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).

ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)
ŏ To set linking, tap the Link item.
Set it to ON and tap the screen.

132 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

Aileron → Rudder[Corresponding model type]:
Airplane/glider, general

Use this mix when you want to mix the rudders
with aileron operation.
ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
ŏ Mixing during Áight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ The mixing rate can be Àne-tuned by setting a VR.

AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 1
Wingletat Flying wing

(

AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 2
Wingletat Flying wing

(

)

)

V-TAILRUDDER 2
RUDDERRUDDERŏ Select [Aileronń Rudder] at themodel menu and call the setup
screen shown below.

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Fine tuning VR setting

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Operation mode
Adjustment rate

Setting methodŏ Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ When setting a switch, tap to the [--] itemof the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the back of this manual.
ŏ When setting a VR, tap to the Fine Tuning"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set. The VR operation
mode can also be selected.
ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting

method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)[Fine tuning VR operation mode][LIN.] M i x i n g r a t e 0  a t c e n t e r o f V R .
When the VR is turned clockwise andcounterclockwise, the mixing rateincreases and decreases, respectively.
[ATL+] Mixing rate 0 at left end of VR.
When the VR is turned, the mixing rateincreases.
[ATL-] Mixing rate 0 at right end of VR.
When the VR is turned, the mixing rateincreases.
[SYM.] When the VR is turned to the left or
right of the neutral position, the mixing
rate increases.

＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 133

Elevator → Camber [Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more
This function is used when you want to mix thecamber Àaps with elevator operation. When used,the Àaps are lowered by up elevator, and lift canbe increased.

ŏ Select [ElevatorńCamber] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
ŏReturn to Model menu

Note: Tailless wing elevator can be operated
when this mix is activated.
ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ The mixing rate can be Àne-tuned by setting a VR.

Currently selected condition name

● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Overall adjustment by
Rate A and Rate B.

The value inside theparentheses shows thecurrent rudder position.

Ailerons and flaps rateadjustment

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Fine tuning VR setting

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Operation mode
Adjustment rate

Setting methodŏ Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ When setting a switch, tap the [--] item of
the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ When setting a VR, tap the Fine tuning"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set.
The VR operation mode can also be
selected.
ŏ A mixing curve can also be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)

134 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

Camber mixing[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more

This function adjusts the rate of camber
operation which operates the wing camber(ailerons, camber flaps, brake flaps) in thenegative and positive directions. The aileron,flap, and elevator rates can also be adjusted
independently by curve, and attitude changes
caused by camber operation can be corrected.

ŏ The up/down side rates of the aileron, flap, andelevator servos can be adjusted by curve. Whenthe mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing themixing rate polarity (+ or -).
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ A delay can be set for each condition. A cut
switch which can turn OFF the delay function canbe set.
ŏ The speed of the aileron, Áap, and elevator servos
can be set. (In side/Out side)ŏ Select [Camber mixing] at the model
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.
Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Currently selected condition nameServo speed setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Condition delay cut
switchCondition delay settingŏReturn to Model menu

Ailerons, flaps
and elevators rateadjustment● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Overall adjustment by
Rate A and Rate B.

＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 135

Setting methodŏ Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ When setting a switch, tap to the [--] itemof the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ When setting a condition delay, tap to the[Condition delay] item.
Set the delay.

(Curve/rate setup screen)ŏ The curve and rate are adjusted by callingthe aileron, flap, and elevator curve/ratescreens.
The rate and curve of each servo can be set
by calling each screen. (For a description of
the curve setting method, see the description
at the back of this manual.)
The servo speed can also be adjusted.

When setting a cut switch, tap [Cut-switch]and tap the screen to call the selection
screen, and then select the switch and set its
ON direction. (Always ON at [--] setting)(For a description of the condition delay
function, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)

FLP 4
FLP 3
(Brake Flap) (Brake Flap)
FLP 1
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)(Camber Flap)
AIL1
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)(Chip Aileron)
V-TAILELEVATORELEVATOR 2AILVATORELEVATORELEVATOR 2

LS

136 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

Airbrake → ELE[Corresponding model type]:
Airplane/glider, general

AIR BRAKE

This mix is used when you want to mix theelevators with airbrake (spoiler) operation. It
raises the elevators to correct for dropping of thenose during airbrake operation.
*This function does not operate when airbrake is not assigned
at the Function menu in the Linkage menu.
ŏ The Rate 1 side/Rate 2 side mixing rate with theelevator servos can be adjusted.
ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ The mixing rate can be Àne-tuned by setting a VR.

ŏ Select [Airbrakeń ELE] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

AILVATOR

V-TAILELEVATORELEVATORELEVATOR 2

ELEVATOR 2*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Up/Down overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Adjustment ofelevator servo

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Fine tuning
setting

Setting methodŏ Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ When setting a switch, tap the [--] item of
the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.
ŏ When setting a VR, tap the Fine tuning"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set.The VR operation
mode can also be set.
(For a description of the Àne tuning VR setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 137

Camber ﬂap → ELE[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/
glider, 2 ailerons + 1 Áap or more

This mixing is used to correct changes (elevator
direction) generated when the camber Àaps (speedÀaps) are used.
ŏ The elevator servos up side/down side rate can be
adjusted. When the mixing direction is reversedby the linkage, adjustments can be made bychanging the mixing rate polarity (+ or ²).
ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ The mixing rate can be Àne-tuned by setting a VR.

ŏ Select [Camber flapńELE] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

FLP 1(Camber Flap)

AILVATOR

V-TAILELEVATOR

FLP 2(Camber Flap)

ELEVATOR 2

ELEVATORELEVATOR 2Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Up/Down overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Adjustment ofelevator servo

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Fine tuning
setting

Setting methodŏ Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ When setting a switch, tap to the [--] itemof the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen. Then, select the switch andset its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ Tap elevator servos. Adjust the mixing rate.

*When the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or –).

ŏ When setting a VR, tap the Fine tuning "--"
item and tap the screen to call the selection
screen, and then select the VR. The VR
operation mode can be selected.
ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)

138 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

Rudder → Aileron[Corresponding model type]:
Airplane/glider, general

This function is used when you want to mix
the ailerons with rudder operation. It is used
when rudder is applied during roll maneuvers,
knife edge, etc. of stunt planes. It can be used tobank scale models, large models, etc. like a fullsize plane.
ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
ŏ Mixing during Áight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ Linking can be set: Link this mix to other mixes.
ŏ The mixing rate can be Àne-tuned by setting a VR.

(

AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 1
Wingletat Flying wing

AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 2
Wingletat Flying wing)(

V-TAILRUDDER 2
RUDDERRUDDERŏ Select [RudderńAileron] at the model menu
and call the setup screen shown below.

)

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] item

Fine tuning
setting

Setting methodŏ Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ When setting a switch, tap to the [--] itemof the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen. Then, select the switch andset its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see back of this manual.)ŏ When setting a VR, tap to the Fine tuning"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set.

The VR operation mode can also be set.
(For a description of the Àne tuning VR setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the back of this manual.)ŏ When linking: tap the [Link] item. (ON isdisplayed.)＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 139

Rudder → Elevator[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general

This function is used when you want to mix
elevator operation with rudder operation. It is used
to correct undesirable tendencies when rudder
is applied in roll maneuvers, knife edge, etc. ofacrobatic planes.

ŏ Link can be set: Links this mixing to other mixings.
ŏ The mixing rate can be Àne-tuned by setting a VR.
(Fine tuning)ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ Select [RudderńElevator] at themodel menu and call the setup
screen shown below.

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Up/Down overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] item

Setting methodŏ Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ When setting a switch, tap to the [--] itemof the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen. Then, select the switch andset its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ When setting a VR, tap the Fine tuning"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen and then select the VR. The

Fine tuning
setting

adjustment rate can be set.
The VR operation mode can also be set.
(For a description of the Àne tuning VR setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ When linking: tap the [Link] item. (ON isdisplayed.)

140 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

Butterﬂy[Corresponding model type]: Glider, 2 ailerons or more

This function allows powerful brake operation
by simultaneously raising the left and rightailerons and lowering the flaps (camber flap,
brake Àap).
This setting will allow the ailerons to be raised
while the flaps are simultaneously lowered.
Butterfly (crow) produces an extremely efficientlanding configuration by accomplishing thefollowing:
1. Slow the aircraft·s velocity.
2. Provide washout at the wing tips to reduce
the tendency to tip stall.
3. Create more lift toward the center of thewing allowing it to Áy at a slower speed.

When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ The butterfly operation reference point can beoffset. When the screen is tapped with the offset
item selected when operated to the position to
be changed, the reference point is offset. If thereference point is offset too much, unexpected
operation may be performed.
ŏ The ailerons and flaps operation speed can be
adjusted. (In side/Out side)ŏ A delay can be set for each condition. A cut
switch which can turn OFF the delay function canalso be set.
ŏ The differential rate can be adjusted.
*When servo binding occurs when setting the ailerons andÀaps in butterÀy mixing, use the AFR function to adjust therate.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.

ŏ Select [Butterfly] at the model
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.

To next page

In speed

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Out speed
Condition delay setting

Condition delay cut
switchThe diﬀerential rate
can be adjusted.

（First）0 〜 27
（Slowly）*When differential rate is "+", Up rate is decrease and
DOWN rate is increase.
*When differential rate is "-", the calculation method of UP/
DOWN and a direction become reverse.

When offsetting the butterfly operationreference point, operate to the throttle
stick point you want to change and thentouch the Offset button. The reference
point displays 0%. When [Yes] is touched,
the reference point is changed. Then,"Initialize elevator curve?" appears,
allowing you to conﬁrm your setting.

*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.

＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 141ŏReturn to Model menu
Select the Mixing RateAIL and FLP box. Adjust
the mixing rates.

Elevator rateadjustment(To elevator curve setup screen)

Fine tuning
setting*In case of tailless
wing not display.

(Elevator correction rate setup screen)

The offset position isindicated by a red dottedline by an elevator curve.

Overall adjustment
by Rate A and Rate B

Mixing curve setting*For a description of the curve setting method,
see the description at the back of this manual.

FLP 4
FLP 3
(Brake Flap) (Brake Flap)
FLP 1
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)(Camber Flap)
AIL1
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)(Chip Aileron)
V-TAILELEVATORELEVATOR 2AILVATORELEVATORELEVATOR 2

142 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

Throttle stick full stroke MODE
ŏ0RGH$(Normal)ŏ The butterfly operation direction is reversed
at the neutral position (50) of the throttle
stick.

ŏ0RGH%(Throttle stick full stroke MODE)
ŏ It does not reverse at the neutral position,
so you can set the butterfly operation startpoint with the full stroke of the throttle stick.

At oﬀset 20

At oﬀset 20

At oﬀset 70

At oﬀset 70

The direction of butterﬂy motion is reversed.

The direction of butterﬂy motion is not reversed.

＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 143

[Corresponding model type]: Glider, general

Trim mix 1/2

These functions call the ailerons, elevators, andÀaps (camber Àaps, brake Àaps) trim offset rates
preset according to the Àight state.
The amount of ailerons, elevator, and flaps(camber Àap, brake Àap) trim offset can be set toa switch.
As an example Trim mix 1 can be set up forlaunching, with speed Àaps and ailerons dropped,
and a slight amount of up elevator. Trim mix
2 can be used for high speed flying, with both
ailerons and speed Àaps reÀexed slightly, and a bitof down elevator.
The trim functions can be activated duringÀight by setting a switch. To prevent sudden trimchanges when switching Àight conditions, a delay
can be set to provide a smooth transition between
the two. Trim mix 2 will have priority over Trimmix 1.

Example1. Move to the [INH] item. Set the trim mix function to[ON].
*When separating the settings for each condition, move tothe [Group] item and set it to [Single].
2. Select the ON/OFF switch.
3. Select the [Manual] or [Auto] mode.
In the [Auto] mode, also select an auto SW. This
switch can be linked to a stick, etc.
Speed!
In: The operation speed at switch ON can be set.
Out: The return speed at switch OFF can be set.
Fine Tuning!
The offset rate can be varied in the Fine Tuning
numeric range set at screen by VR, etc. selection.
Condition Delay!
When Áight conditions are set, the operation speed
can be set for each condition. Condition delay
operation can be interrupted and each rudder
Tuickly returned to its original position by selecting a
cut switch.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.

ŏ Select [Trim mix1 or 2] at the model
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.

When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)

To next page

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

In speed

Manual/Auto mode
selection
Manual: Switches thefunction ON/OFF byswitchAuto: Trim mix function
call can be linked to a
stick, etc. A stick switch,etc. separate from thefunction ON/OFF switch
is set.

Out speed

Condition delay
cut switch

Condition delay setting

When a ﬁne tuning VR is set,
the trim rates of ailerons,
flaps and elevators can be
adjusted.

（First）0 〜 27
（Slowly）

ŏReturn to Model menu

The value inside theparentheses shows thecurrent rudder position.

The oﬀset rate of ailerons, ﬂaps and elevators can be adjusted.
Tap to the corresponding setting item. Adjust the rate.

144 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

Snap roll

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general(Example) Setting example for F3A

This function selects the switch and rateadjustment of each rudder, (ailerons, elevators, orÀaps) when a snap roll is performed.
ŏ Four snap roll directions can be set. (Right/up,
right/down, left/up, left/down)ŏ Operation mode: When [Master] mode is selected,
the Snap Roll function is turned ON/OFF by masterswitch in the state in which the direction switch
was switched to the direction in which you wantto snap roll. When [Single] mode is selected, snap
roll in each direction can be executed by meansof independent switches.
ŏ A safety switch can be set. As a safety measure,the switch can be set so that snap roll is not
executed when, for instance, the landing
gear is lowered, even if the switch is turned on
accidentally. The snap roll switch is activated only
when the safety switch is ON.
ŏ The operation speed of the aileron, elevator, andflap servos can be adjusted for each snap rolldirection. (In side/out side)ŏ Mode: [Master]ŏ Safety SW: [SW-G] (Safety measure)ŏ Master SW: [SW-H] (Main switch for
executing snap roll)ŏ Direction switches:*The snap roll up side left and right and down side left andright direction switches are selected here.
Right/Up: [SW-D] OFF-OFF-ON
Right/Down: [SW-D] ON-OFF-OFF
Left/Up: [SW-A] OFF-OFF-ON
Left/Down: [SW-A] ON-OFF-OFFŏ Speed adjustment
The operation speed of each control
surface when the snap switch is ON canbe changed and snap roll executed bystick while there is switch operation can be
performed.

ŏ Select [Snap roll] at the model menu
and call the setup screen shown
The ON/OFF switch
below.
of snap roll is chosen.

The safety switch is
chosen.
To next pageŏReturn to Model menu
Master or Single ischosenCondition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Snap rolldirections

Master mode : Direction
switches
Single mode : Snap rollswitches

Aileron, elevator and
Rudder rate adjustment

In speed

Out speed（First）0 〜 27
（Slowly）＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 145

Air brake
This function is used when an air brake isnecessary when landing or diving, etc.
The preset elevators and flaps (camber flap,
brake flap) offset amount can be activated by aswitch.
The offset amount of the aileron, elevator, andflap servos can be adjusted as needed. Also the
speed of the aileron, elevator, and Àap servos canbe adjusted. (In side/Out side) A delay can be set
for each condition, and a Cut switch which willturn OFF the delay can be chosen. Trim amounts
can be fine-tuned by setting a VR. You can also
set the Auto Mode, which will link Airbrake to a
stick, switch, or dial. A separate stick switch ordial can also be set as the ON/OFF switch.

ŏ Select [Air brake] at the model menu and call the
setup screen shown below.

Elevator
Aileron 2
Aileron 1*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.
To next page

When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)

In speed

The ON/OFF switch of
air brake is chosen.
Manual/Auto mode
selection
Manual: Switches thefunction ON/OFF byswitchAuto: Air brake function
call can be linked to a
stick, etc. A stick switch,etc. separate from thefunction ON/OFF switch
is set.

Out speed
Condition delay
setting and cut switch
setting.

Fine tuning settingŏReturn to Model menu

The value inside theparentheses shows thecurrent rudder position.

146 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞（First）0 〜 27
（Slowly）

Offset：The offset
rate of ailerons, flaps,and elevators can be
a d j u s t e d . Ta p t o t h ecorresponding setting
item. Adjust the rate.
Fine tuning：When a ﬁnetuning VR is set on thenext page, the ailerons',
ﬂaps', and elevators' trim
rates can be adjusted.
Tap to the corresponding
setting item. Adjust therate.

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider/multicopter, general

GyroThis function is used when a GYA Series gyrois used to stabilize the aircraft's attitude. The
sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/GYmode) can be switched with a switch.

Function menu of the Linkage menu to assign the sensitivity
channel (Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3) used to a vacant channel
beforehand.
Set [Control] and [Trim] other than Function to [--].

ŏ Three rates (Rate1/Rate2/Rate3) can be switched.
ŏ Up to 3 axes (Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3) can be
simultaneously controlled.
*Initial setting does not assign a sensitivity channel. Use theŏ Select [Gyro] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
Tapping this will change INH to either ON or OFF
and enable operation. Adjustment of the threerates (sensitivity) and switching between Normaland AVCS is possible.

ŏReturn to Model menu

Condition group/
single mode selection(Gr. /Sngl)

The ON/OFF switch of
gyro is chosen.
The operation mode
(AVCS/NOR) andsensitivity of the 3axes Gyro/Gyro2/
Gyro3 can be set.

3 rate (gyro gain)
adjustment

ŏ Three rates (Rate1/Rate2/Rate3) can be used.
Tap to the [Rate] item. Adjust the rate.
ŏ When using this function, Tap [INH].
ŏ When a Futaba GYA gyro is used, when [GY] type is selected, thesensitivity set value is directly read in both the AVCS and Normal modes.
ŏ When setting a switch, tap the Switch item and tap the "--" button to callthe selection screen, and then select the switch and set its ON direction.
(For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at
the end of this manual.)＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 147

(Example) Setting three axis using a G<A440 and G<A441 (2)ŏ Wing type: Aileron 2 servos mounted fuselage selectedŏ Set 5CH → Gyro (GYA441AIL), 7CH → Gyro2 (GYA441ELE), 8CH → Gyro3 (GYA440RUD), Control and Trim → "--" : at
the Function menu of the Linkage menu.
ŏ Gyro setting of the Model menu.

Rate
1
2
3

ACT
OFF/ON
INH
ON/OFF

Type
GY

SwitchSE

Gyro
AVCS : 60%

Gyro ２
AVCS : 60%

Gyro ３
AVCS : 60%

GY

SENormal : 60%

Normal : 60%

Normal : 60%*Set so that Rate 1 is turned on at the back position of switch E
and Rate 3 is turned ON at the front position. Since switch E is R7008SB
turned OFF at the center, Rate 2 remains [INH].

GYA441

Aileron servo

AVCS
GAIN 0％S.BUS2 port

GYA441NORMAL

Elevator servo

When AVCS is used werecommend that thesensitivity CH be set tothe 3-position.
GYA440148 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

Rudder servo

Ailevator[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, Tail type
(Effective only when 2 servos used at the elevators)
Ailevator

This function improves the operating
performance of the roll axis by operating theelevators as ailerons.
Ailevator is where each elevator in a standard(conventional) or v-tail moves independently, likeailerons on a wing. In addition to each elevator side
moving up and down together, each side moves in
opposite directions when moving as an ailevator.
On a V-tail, this is also known as a ruddervator,
as they can serve the same purpose. Typically,both ailevator and ailerons are coupled together tomaximize roll performance, especially on larger
wingspan planes.

ELEVATOR(AILERON 5)

ELEVATOR 2(AILERON 6)

Note: Select ailevator as the Model type at theModel type screen. This changes the output
channel. Check the Function menu.

ŏ Select [Ailevator] at the model
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.
ŏReturn to Model menu
Condition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)(Elevator function)
The up and down rates of the left andright elevators when the elevator stick ismanipulated can be individually adjusted.

(Aileron function)
When the elevators are used asailerons, aileron travel of the left andright elevators can be adjusted.

ŏ Travel adjustment
Tap to the item you want to adjust.
Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
*If the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).
*If a large value of travel is speci¿ed, when the sticks are
moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run outof travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.

＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 149

Acceleration[Corresponding model type]: Glider, general

Acceleration setting can be performed at Elevator,
Elevator ĺ Camber and Aileron ĺ Rudder. (Glider
only)ŏ This setting is divided into elevator setting and camber
setting. The setting method is the same.
ŏ Camber setting sets the acceleration function for Ele
to camber mixing. Setting is not performed when Ele tocamber mixing is INH.
ŏ The acceleration function can be set for both the upside and down side.
ŏ Function ON/OFF switch setting is performed for
Aileronń Rudder setting only.
ŏ Aileronń Rudder setting is acceleration
function setting for Aileronń Rudder mixing. It is not
performed when Aileronń Rudder mixing is INH.

ŏ Select [Acceleration] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)

Condition group/
single mode selection(Gr. /Sngl)

To next page
2/3 : Elevator → Camber
3/3 : Aileron → Rudder
Operation up to thisrange will initiate
acceleration.

ŏReturn to Model menu

Act position
The rate the angle
increases.

Current position

The return time after operation (Damping)can be set.
（First return）1 〜 100（Slow return）（Acceleration doesn't function as 0.）

Setting method
ŏ Acceleration rate setting (Rate)ŏ The return time after operation (Damping)can be set.
ŏ The operation point at accelerationand deceleration can be set. When an
operation point is exceeded, acceleration is
performed.

Note: When using the acceleration function,
since the servo stroke is large, make yoursettings so there is no binding of your linkage.

150 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, general

Motor

This function lets you set the operation speed
when the motor of an F5B or other EP glider isstarted by switch. The operation speed can be set
in 2 ranges of slow speed flight and high speedÀight (Speed 1/Speed 2). This function can also be
operated as a safety function by setting 2 switches.
ŏ The in side and out side operating speeds can be
adjusted independently in 2 ranges (Speed 1/
Speed 2).
ŏ The boundary between the 2 ranges can be set.
(From speed 1 to speed 2)

ŏ Select [Motor] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.

ŏ The set operation speed operation can be
activated at initial operation only. (1 time
operation) However, operation can be repeatedby setting the switch to OFF before operation isÀnished. When you want to reset 1 time operation,
set the ACT/INH item to [INH] and then reset it to[ON].
ŏ The motor (CH3) is controlled by SW-G. (Initial
setting) When changing the switch or stick which
controls the motor, first change Function of the
Linkage menu.
Note: When using this function, always check initial
operation with the propeller removed.

ŏReturn to Model menuŏ When using this function, Tap [INH].
ŏ Group/single mode switching(For more information, see the description
at the back of this manual.)ŏ Switch
A switch that turns the function itself
ON/OFF can be selected.
ŏ Motor off position
Tap the motor off button when [SW-G] is in
the motor OFF position you want to set. The
direction of the motor switch is memorized.
The screen graph display OFF direction alsochanges.

ŏ When using this function, Tap [INH].
ŏ When you want to set the "One time mode",tap to the [One time] item and tap thescreen.
ŏ Speed 1 to 2
The speed 1 and speed 2 region boundary
can be changed,
ŏ Operation speed adjustment
The speed when speed 1 and speed 2 are
ON (In) and OFF (Out) can be adjusted.

Notes
ŏ First decide the motor OFF direction, and then
set the speed. When you want to reset the
motor OFF direction, also reset the speed.
ŏ We recommend that motor OFF be set incombination with F/S.
ŏ Set the basic operation direction with the reverse
function to match the ESC used.
ŏ Always set the motor OFF position.

＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 151

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, Tail type V-tailV-TailThis function lets you adjust for left and right rudder
angle changes at elevator and rudder operation of aV-tail airplane.
V-tail is when 2 servos are used together to control
rudder movement as elevators. In addition to eachrudder side moving up and down together, each side
moves in opposite directions when moving as elevators.
On a V-tail, this is also known as a ruddervator, as they
can serve the same purpose.

ELEVATOR(RUDDER 2)

RUDDER(ELEVATOR 2)

ŏ Select [V-Tail] at the model menu and callthe setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Model menu

Condition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)(Elevator function)
Up and down travel adjustment at
CH1 and CH2 elevator operation(Rudder function)
Left and right travel adjustment at
CH1 and CH2 rudder operation

ŏ Travel adjustment
Tap to the item you want to adjust.
Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
*If the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).
*If a large value of travel is speci¿ed, when the sticks are
moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run outof travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.

152 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

Winglet[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, winglet(2RUD)

This function adjusts the left and right rudder
angles of airplanes with winglets.
Winglets are used to improve the efficiency ofaircraft lowering the lift-induced drag caused by
wingtip vortices. The winglet is a vertical or angled
extension at the tips of each wing.
Winglets work by increasing the effective aspectratio wing without adding greatly to the structuralstress and hence necessary weight of its structure- an extension of wing span would also permit
lowering of induced drag, though it would causeparasitic drag and would require boosting thestrength of the wing and hence its weight - there
would come a point at which no overall usefulsaving would be made. A winglet helps to solve thisby effectively increasing the aspect ratio without
adding to the span of the wing.

RUDDER 1
Winglet(at Flying
wing )RUDDER 2
Wingletat Flying wing()

ŏ Select [Winglet] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Model menu

Condition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)(Rudder 1/2)
The travel at rudder stick left and right
operation can be individually set.

ŏ Travel adjustment
Tap to the item you want to adjust.
Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
*If the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).

＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 153

MODEL MENU (Helicopter functions)This section contains information on thecommands that apply to helicopters only. For
instructions on airplane, glider and multicopter,
refer to the sections pertaining to those aircraft.
Use the Model type function in the Linkagemenu to select the swash type matched to thefuselage beforehand.
◆ Condition hold
When performing adjustments, such as idling up, whenthe engine is engaged, keep the throttle stable so as to preventthe engine from revving too high. Once your adjustments arecomplete, always make sure to set the function to [OFF].
WARNING

Also, add flight conditions at the Condition
Select screen if necessary before setting the model
data at each function. (Up to 8 conditions can beused)
The AFR function, dual rate function and otherfunctions common to all model types, are describedin a separate section.
*Condition hold ON/OFF operation is possible under normal
conditions and the throttle stick is more than 1/3rd into the slow
throttle range. Throttle servos will remain at the throttle stick
position during ON operation.

● ON/OFF operation on the Home screen

Under the conditions described above, tap the Condition holdFor safety reasons, when performing individual [OFF] displayed on the screen.
adjustments it is recommended that you shut off
During function operation, Condition hold will display [ON]the engine and disconnect the motor to prevent
and an alarm will sound.
rotation.

*Sudden, abrupt rotation can result in death or serious injury.

Tap this icon to
go to the modelmenu.

ŏ Select the function
name and return to
the Home screen.
(Model menu screen example)*The Model menu screen
depends on the model type.

ŰƒƇƈƏŃƐƈƑƘŃŋūƈƏƌƆƒƓƗƈƕŌŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŃƗƄƅƏƈ

Pitch curve: Pitch curve and hovering trim adjustment
Throttle curve: Throttle curve and hovering trim adjustment
Acceleration: Allows a brief "overload" in response to sudden throttle and pitch commands
Throttle hold: Moves the throttle to idle during autorotation
Swash mixing: Compensates for each control response
Throttle mixing: Compensates for power loss when cyclic applied
PitchĺNeedle: Adjusts response curve in different Àight conditions
PitchĺRudder: Handles torque changes from pitch angle inputs
Gyro: Used to switch gyro sensitivity
Governor: Used to switch RPM of the helicopter’s head

154 ＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞

Pitch curve / Pitch trimųƌƗƆƋŃƆƘƕƙƈ

This function adjusts the pitch operation curvefor each Àight condition for the optimal Àight state
relative to movement of the throttle stick.

ŏ Select [Pitch curve] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

*Up to 17 points can be set for the point curve types.
However, when using the 3 points or 5 points speci¿ed tocreate a curve, a simple curve can be created by reducing
the number of input points to 3 or 5, and then entering thespeci¿ed value at the corresponding points that you createda curve.

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu

● Mixing curve setting

Point curve type is 9
points (initial), but for
simple use, 4~5 points
are suﬃcient.

*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.

Normal curve adjustment
ŏ For normal curve, usually use [Point] typeand create a basic pitch curve centeredabout hovering. Use this function together
with the THR curve (normal) function andadjust the curve so that up/down control isbest at a constant engine speed.

Idle up curve adjustment
ŏ For the high side pitch curve, set the
maximum pitch which does overload theengine. For the low side pitch curve, create
curves matched to loop, roll, 3D, andother purposes and use the idle up curves
according to the performance.

Throttle hold curve adjustment
ŏ The throttle hold curve is used when
executing auto rotation dives.

Operation precautions

WARNING
When actually starting the engine andﬂying, always set the idle up condition
switch to OFF and start the engine in
the idling state.
＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞ 155

Setting method
ŏ Group/Single item: When you also want to
input the same setting contents at otherconditions, perform setting in the groupmode. In this case, the same contents are
input to the other conditions set in the groupmode. When you want to set each condition
independently, select the single mode
(initial setting). Other conditions can be set
independently.

Curve setting examples
The screens shown below are curves createdby entering the pitch rate at low, center, and highside (3 points or 5 points) at each condition. Whenactually creating a curve, input the rate speci¿ed at
the fuselage (or the reference value).

*For a description of the curve setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Ɣ3LWFK Curve ([ample
Normal Curve

Idle-up 1 Curve

Idle-up 2 Curve

Pitch servo speed setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)

156 ＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞

Hold CurveųƌƗƆƋŃƗƕƌƐŃŋūƒƙƈƕƌƑƊŃƓƌƗƆƋŏŃƋƌƊƋŃƓƌƗƆƋŏŃƏƒƚŃƓƌƗƆƋŌ
The hovering pitch, low pitch, and high pitch trim setup screen can be called from the Pitch curve setup
screen.
ŏReturn to Model menu

Hovering pitch trim
setting

Low/high pitch trim
setting

Hovering pitch trim

High Pitch/Low Pitch Trim

The Hovering Pitch trim function trims the pitch
near the hovering point. Normally, it is used withthe hovering condition. The hovering pitch can be¿ne tuned for changes in rotor speed accompanying
changes in temperature, humidity, and other Àight
conditions. Adjust the hovering pitch so thatrotor speed is constant. This function can be used
together with the hovering Throttle Trim function
for more delicate operation.

High Pitch/Low Pitch Trim is the pitch servo
high side and low side trim function.

Setting methodŏ When using only the hovering (normal)
condition, switch the group mode to thesingle mode (initial setting) before setting.
ŏ Tap [INH]. (ON is displayed.)ŏ Select the adjustment knob.
Selection example: LD
ŏ The trim operation mode (Mode: Center/
Normal) can be selected.
Center mode: Maximum amount of change
near center by center trim operation(recommended)
Normal mode: Normal trim (parallel
movement trim) operation. The advantage
of using this mode is that the hovering pitch
can be adjusted without changing the
curve.
ŏ Trim adjustment range (Range) setting
When this value is made small, trim can only
be used near the center.
ŏ The trim rate can be adjusted and theoperation direction can be changed.

Setting methodŏ When setting the adjustment knobs common
to all the conditions, set them in the groupmode.
ŏ Tap [INH]. (ON is displayed.)ŏ Select the adjustment knobs.
Selection example: LS (high side), RS (lowside)
ŏ The trim rate can be adjusted and theoperation direction can be changed.
ŏ Trim acts as high side or low side trim with thecenter as the standard.

＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞ 157

Throttle curve / Throttle Hover trimŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃŃƆƘƕƙƈ

This function adjusts the throttle operation curvefor each condition for optimum engine speed tothrottle stick movement.
Up to 17 curve points can be set for the point
curve type. However, when the 5 points and otherŏ Select [Throttle curve] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

point data is used, a simple curve can be easily
created by reducing the number of input points ofthe curve to 5 and entering the specified value atthe corresponding points.

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu

● Mixing curve setting*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the back of thismanual.

Point curve type is 9
points (initial), but for
simple use, 4~5 points
are suﬃcient.

Throttle hover trim
operating position(White line)

Normal curve adjustment
ŏ Normal curve creates a basic curve
centered around hovering. Use it alongwith the normal pitch curve and adjust sothat up/down control at a constant engine
speed is easiest.

Idle up curve adjustment
ŏ Set an idle up curve that maintains a
constant speed at all times, even during
operation which reduces the pitch
performed in Áight. Create a curve matched
to loop, roll, 3D, or other purposes and theidle up curve according to the performance.

Operation precautions

WARNING
When actually starting the engine andﬂying, always set the idle up condition
switch to OFF and start the engine in
the idling mode.

Setting method
ŏ Group/single item: When you want tosimultaneously enter the same settings toother functions, make the settings in thegroup mode. In this case, the same setting

158 ＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞

contents are entered to the all conditions.
When you want to set each condition
independently, make the settings after
selecting the single mode (Initial setting).

Curve setting examples
The curves shown below are created by using
the point curve type and inputting the data of the
5 points 0% (low side), 25%, 50% (center), 75%,
100% (high) side at each condition. They areƔ7KroWWle Curve ([ample
Normal Curve

Idle-up 1 Curvecreated by reducing the number of points on theline to 5. When actually creating a curve, enter
the data speci¿ed per the aircraft (or the reference
value).
*For a description of the curve creation method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.
Idle-up 2 Curve

Throttle servo speed setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)ŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃūƒƙƈƕŃƗƕƌƐ
The Throttle Hover trim setup screen can be called from the Throttle curve setup screen.
ŏReturn to Model menu

The Throttle Hover function trims the throttle
near the hovering point. Normally, use it withhovering conditions. Changes in rotor speed
accompanying changes in the temperature,humidity, and other flight conditions can betrimmed. Adjust the throttle so that rotor rotation ismost stable. More delicate trimming is also possible
by using this function along with the Hover Pitch
function.
Setting methodŏ When using the hovering (normal) condition
only, switch the group mode to the single
mode (initial setting) and make the settings.
ŏ Tap [INH]. (ON is displayed.)ŏ Select the adjustment knob.
Selection example: RD
ŏ The trim operation mode (Mode: Center/
Normal) can be selected.
Center mode: Maximum rate of change
near center by center trim operation(recommended)
Normal mode: Normal trim (horizontal
movement trim) operation.
ŏ Trim adjustment range (Range) setting
When the value is made small, trim acts only
near the center.
ŏ The trim rate can be adjusted and theoperation direction can be set.

＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞ 159

Acceleration
This function is used to adjust the pitch andthe throttle rise characteristic at acceleration/
deceleration operation. An acceleration function
which temporarily increases the pitch and throttle
operations at throttle stick acceleration/deceleration
operation can be set.
Example of acceleration function useŏWhen used at pitch, the acceleration
function is effective when you want to
Tuicken the response of the fuselage at 3DÁight Áip, etc.
When used, high pitch temporarily exceeds
maximum pitch, but immediately returns tomaximum pitch.

ŏ Select [Acceleration] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)

Condition group/
single mode selection(Gr. /Sngl)

To next page
1/2 : Pitch
2/2 : Throttle
Operation up to thisrange will initiate
acceleration.

ŏReturn to Model menu

Act position
The rate the angle
increases.

Current position

The return time after operation (Damping)can be set.
（First return）1 〜 100（Slow return）（Acceleration doesn't function as 0.）

Setting method
ŏ Acceleration can be set at both setting
at acceleration (high) and setting at
deceleration (low).
(The operation point is displayed on agraph.)
ŏ Acceleration rate setting (Rate)ŏ The return time after operation (Damping)can be set.

160 ＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞

ŏ The operation point at accelerationand deceleration can be set. When an
operation point is exceeded, acceleration is
performed.
Note: When using the acceleration function,
since the pitch stroke is large, make yoursettings so there is no binding of your linkage.

Throttle hold

Example of use

This function sets the throttle cut position for
autorotation. The throttle position can also be set toan idling position. Setting of these 2 positions canbe selected by switch. This allows use for switching
during training.

ŏ Select [Throttle hold] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

ŏ Since throttle hold has 2 modes (Cut) and(Idle), using it in the Idling mode during
training and in the Cut mode when
stopping the engine at contest, etc. isconvenient.
Note: When throttle hold is set to ON in the normal
condition, throttle hold acts and the throttle servo
is deactivated. Always set throttle hold to ON in thehold condition.

ŏReturn to Model menu
Current position
Set to the engine
stop position.

Set to the idling
position.

Hold position

Engine cut setting

Setting method
ŏ Operation mode selection
Manual mode(Manual): The throttle holdfunction is operated by switch operation
only.
Auto mode(Auto): The throttle hold function
operation is linked to the throttle stick
position.
Auto position setting: When the auto mode isselected, the throttle position (auto position)
can be selected. Move the throttle stick to
the position you want to set and tap thescreen. (Auto position is displayed.)ŏ Hold position adjustment
Throttle Hold (Cut) sets the throttle cut
position. Adjust it so that the carburetor is fully
closed.
Throttle Hold (Idle): Make this adjustment tomaintain idling for training. Adjustments canbe made based on the throttle curve idle
position.
ŏ The throttle servo operating speed can be
adjusted. (Speed)ŏ Throttle cut or training function can beswitched by hold function selector switch.

Engine idle setting

Operation precautions

WARNING
When starting the engine, conﬁrm thatthe idle up condition and throttle holdcondition are OFF.

＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞ 161

Swash mixing
The swash mix function is used to correct theswash plate in the aileron (roll) direction andelevator (cyclic pitch) corresponding to each
operation of each condition.
Adjustment by independent curve for aileron,elevator, and pitch operations is possible. The
operation can be smoothly adjusted by calling up
the “Curve setup” screen by tapping the mixing
item that corresponds to the mixing and direction
which needs correction.

Example of use
ŏ As an example, use swash mixing to correctundesirable tendencies in the roll direction.
ŏ For a condition which uses Aileron to
Elevator, set this function to ON. Whenraising the nose at a right roll, when theRate B side is input and the right aileron is
operated, the elevator moves to the downside. Tune by adjusting the Rate. For rightroll, adjust to the rate A side.

ŏ Select [Swash mixing] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)ŏReturn to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.

Setting methodŏ When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.)ŏ When you want to set the same contents atother conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
ŏ The correction rate can be set by curve.
ŏ A switch can be set.
When [--] is set, the swash mixing function is
operated by merely selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, tap to
the [--] item and tap the screen to call theselection screen and set the switch and its
ON position.

162 ＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞

Throttle mixing
This function corrects slowing of engine speed
caused by swash plate operation during aileronor elevator operation. The method of applying
clockwise or counterclockwise torque when
pirouetting can also be corrected.
An acceleration function which temporarily
increases the throttle side correction rate relative torapid stick operation can also be set.
ŏ Select [Throttle mixing] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
ŏReturn to Model menu

● Mixing curve setting*For a description of the curve setting method,
see the description at the back of this manual.

Setting methodŏ When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.)ŏ When you want to set the same contents atother conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
ŏ The correction rate can be set by curve.
ŏ A switch can be set.
When [--] is set, the swash mixing function is
operated by merely selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, tap to
the [--] item and tap the screen to call theselection screen and set the switch and its
ON position.

When correction is necessary, tap to the mixing
item corresponding to the mixing that needs
correction and tap the screen to call the curve setup
screen, and then correct the slowing.
Setting example
ŏ Aileron to Throttle applies a load to theengine and corrects slowing of theengine speed when the aileron stick was
operated. Engine racing can be adjusted
independently at the right aileron and left
aileron by Rates A and B.
"CTRM" : The correction
rate maximum when
the throttle stick iscentered.
"Linear" : Correction
applied for the entire
throttle range.

<Acceleration function setting>ŏ Acceleration can be set for both settings(Left) and (Right)
ŏ Acceleration rate setting (Rate)ŏ The return time (Damping) after operation
can be set.
ŏ The operation point (Act position) when thecorrection rate is increased and decreased
can be set independently. When an
operation point is exceeded, acceleration
operation is performed.

＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞ 163

Pitch → Needle
This mixing is used when the engine is equippedwith needle control or other fuel-air mixture
adjustment. A needle curve can be set.
An acceleration function which temporarily
increases needle operation at throttle stick

acceleration/deceleration operation can be set.
The rise characteristic of the needle servo atacceleration and deceleration operation can be
adjusted.

ŏ Select [PitchńNeedle] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.

Normally, use [Point] type.

Setting methodŏ When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.)ŏ When you want to set the same contents atother conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
ŏ A needle curve can be set.
ŏ A switch can be set.
When [--] is set, the mixing function is
operated by merely selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, tap
to the [--] item. Tap the screen to call theselection screen and set the switch and its
ON position.

164 ＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞< Acceleration function setting>ŏAcceleration can be set at both
acceleration (high) and deceleration (low).
ŏThe acceleration rate (rate) and the return
time after operation (damping) can be set.
ŏAn operation point (Act position) at
acceleration and deceleration can be set.
When an operation point was exceeded,
acceleration operation is performed.

Pitch → Rudder (Revolution mixing)
Use this mix when you want to suppress thereaction torque generated by main rotor pitch andspeed changes during pitch operation. Adjust sothat the nose does not move in the rudder direction.
An acceleration function which temporarily
increases the correction rate at throttle stick
acceleration/deceleration operation can be set. The
mixing rate at acceleration/deceleration can be set.

However, when a GY Series or other heading
hold gyro is used, since correction is performedby the gyro, this mix is not used. If this function
is used when the gyro operation mode is the
AVCS mode, the neutral position will change.

ŏSelect [PitchńRudder]at the model menu
and call the setup
screen shown.
● Mixing curve setting*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.

Normally, use [Point] type.

Setting methodŏ When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.)ŏ When you want to set the same contents atother conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
ŏ A mixing curve is set.

<Normal condition mixing curve><Idle up condition mixing curve>

The mixing curve rate starts from a smallvalue.
For a rotor with a clockwise operation
direction (polarity), when pitch was
operated at the plus side, set so thatmixing is in the clockwise direction. First,
trim at hovering and then adjust theneutral position.
1. Adjustment between slow and hovering
Repeatedly hover from take off and land
from hovering at a constant rate matched
to your own rhythm, and adjust the pitch
so the nose does not deflect when thethrottle is raised and lowered.
2. Throttle high side (climbing and diving fromhovering)
Repeat climbing and diving from hovering
at a constant rate matched to your own
rhythm and adjust the pitch so that thenose does not deflect when the throttle israised and lowered.

Set the mixing rate so that the rudder
direction at high-speed flight is straightahead. Adjust for each condition used.

<Acceleration function setting>ŏ Acceleration operation can be performed
for both setting at acceleration (High)and setting at deceleration (Low).
ŏ Acceleration rate setting (Rate)ŏ The return time after operation (Damping)can be set.
ŏ An operation point (Act position) at
acceleration and deceleration can be set
independently. When an operation point
was exceeded, acceleration operation is
performed.

＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞ 165

Gyro[Helicopter]

This function is used to adjust gyro sensitivity.
The sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/
AVCS mode) can be set for each condition.
The gyro sensitivity can be switched with eachcondition or the switch. (3 sensitivities)*Compatible with 3 axis gyro (CGY750).
ŏ Select [Gyro] at themodel menu and callthe setup screen.

Gyro（RUD)
setting

Note: [Gyro] [Gyro2] [Gyro3] Default function[Gyro]: CH6(FASSTest12CH) CH5(Other system type)[Gyro2] : CH9[Gyro3] : CH10
Always set to [--] both (control) and (trim) for
the [Gyro] function at the Function menu in
the Linkage menu.

Gyro2（AIL)
settingGyro3（ELE)
setting
Tapping these willpull up the detailed
selection screen foreach.

ŏReturn to Model menu

Rate1 Gyro type andgain
The operation mode
(AVCS/NOR) andsensitivity of the 3axes Gyro/Gyro2/
Gyro3 can be set.

Rate2 Gyro type andgain
Rate3 Gyro type andgain

When using Rate2/Rate3, make it
INH → ON or OFF.
Condition group/
single mode selection(Gr. /Sngl)
Use this when you wantto adjust sensitivity via
VR, etc., and not onscreen data entry. Tap "-", select "VR", etc., andthen tap the value toadjust. (Won't operate
when value is "0".)Setting methodŏ When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.)ŏ When you want to set the same contents atother conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
ŏ Three rates can be switched for eachcondition. (Rate1/Rate2/Rate3)
ŏ A Àne tuning VR can be set.

166 ＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞

The ON/OFF switchof gyro is chosen.

3 rate (gyro gain)
adjustment

Usage example #1: Using gyro for only the rudder and adjusting sensitivity for each condition＊ Gyro gain channel
Gyro : CH5
For the FASSTest12CH, Gyro/RUD is 6ch. The gyro sensitivity adjustment connector connects to 6ch.

ŏ Select [Gyro] at themodel menu and callthe setup screen.

This is all that is needed
for use in this case.

Tapping here will let you
select either Normal orAVCS.

B e c a u s e t h esensitivity is switched(Sngl) per condition,
Rate2 and Rate3 are
not used.

Set gain of a rudder

Because sensitivity changes forhovering and idleup, perform
switchover for each condition andadjust sensitivity.

Usage example #2: Using 3-axis gyro CGY750 and adjusting sensitivity for each condition＊ Gyro gain channel
Gyro RUD : CH5 For the FASSTest12CH, Gyro/RUD is 6ch.
Gyro2 AIL : CH9
Gyro3 ELE : CH10
For the CGY750, simply connect the S.BUS; functions do not need to be set.
(For the FASSTest12CH, change Gyron/RUD to 6ch.)

ŏ Select [Gyro] at themodel menu and callthe setup screen.

This is all that is needed
for use in this case.

Tapping here will
let you select either
N o r m a l o r AV C S f o reach of the three axes.

Set gain of a rudder

Set gain of an aileronSet gain of an elevator

B e c a u s e t h esensitivity is switched(Sngl) per condition,
Rate2 and Rate3 are
not used.

Because sensitivity changes forhovering and idleup, perform
switchover for each condition andadjust sensitivity.

＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞ 167

Governor
When using a Futaba governor, this function isused to switch the RPM of the helicopter's head.
Up to 3 rates can be set for each condition.
*The governor is used by connecting the governor speed
setting channel to CH7 (initial setting).

*When using the Fuel Mixture function, the mixture servo
is controlled from the governor. When transmitting the
mixture curve data from the transmitter to the governor, thegovernor AUX (m.trm) connector must be connected to CH8(initial setting) and governor side setting performed. See thegovernor instruction manual.

*When using an independent governor [ON]/[OFF] switch,connect the AUX([ON]/[OFF]) connector of the governor toCH8 (initial setting) and set the switch to CH8 (Governor2)
at the Function menu of the Linkage menu.

Note: Always set (Control) and (Trim) to [--] for[Governor] and [Governor2] of the Function menuof the Linkage menu.

ŏ Select [Governor] at the model menu
and call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Model menu

RPM adjustment
Fine tuning VR settings

Unit display selection:[%] [rpm]

Setting methodƔActivate the mixing
When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.)*When the function is set ON/OFF at the governor setup
screen, the governor rpm setting channel end point servo
travel and limit point are now initialized.
*When changed from INH to ACT (ON), the servo travel isinitialized to 100 and the limit point is initialized to 155.
*When operation is changed to INH at all conditions, theservo travel is initialized to 100 and the limit point isinitialized to 135.

168 ＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞

ƔRPM adjustment
Tap to the rate item .
Adjust the rpm using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: 50 (1500rpm)
Adjustment range: OFF, 0~110 (OFF,
700~3500rpm)*When the value is tapped reset to the initial value.

ƔUnit display selection
Tap to the UNIT item [] [rpm]. Select theunit.

ƔDiplay mode selectionƔFine tuning VR settings*When [rpm] mode is selected above setting, the display
mode can be selected.
* There is no change in the transmitter output even when the"Mode" is changed. Calibration should be performed via thegovernor.
* In order to use the Governor function of the FX-36, it isnecessary to change the settings on the governor for the low
side 700 rpm mode.

When the Mode of the Governor screen's
model menu is changed, the change is also
indicated on-screen.

Tap to the [--] item and tap the screen toaccess the selection screen. Select thecontrol.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Tap to the rate item .
Adjust the trim rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ""ʆʆ" buttons.
Initial value: 0 (0rpm)
Adjustment range: -20~+20
*When the screen is tapped for one second, the sensitivity is
reset to the initial value.

Tap the screen to return to the cursor mode.

main rotor R.P.M.

The chart below indicates themode percentage and thecorresponding RPM.
3900rpm
3500rpm
2700rpm
2500rpm
2100rpm2000rpm
1500rpm

1000rpm

700rpm0%50% : neutral 100% 110%main rotor R.P.M. setting channel travel＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞ 169

Common operations used in function setup screen
This section describes the functions often used at the function setup screen. Refer to it when setting
each function.

ŲƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑƖŃƙƄƏƘƈŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
Tapping the value setting buttons on each screen will cause value input
buttons to appear at the top of the panel.
Value input buttons display
at the top of the panel
Pressing and holding
a value will return it
to its default setting.
Large change
in value

Small change
in value

Large change
in valueŲƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑƖŃƕƈƏƄƗƈƇŃƗƒŃƳƌƊƋƗŃƆƒƑƇƌƗƌƒƑƖ
Group/single mode switching (Gr/Singl)

Condition delay setting

When setting multiple flight conditions,linking the setting contents with all conditions(group mode) or setting independently (singlemode) can be selected. The mode can bechanged at the [Gr] item on each setup screen.

Unnecessary fuselage motion generated
when there are sudden changes in the servo
position and variations in the operating time
between channels can be suppressed by using
the condition delay function of the condition
select function [Condition select].
When the delay function is set at theswitching destination condition, a delay
corresponding to that amount is applied and therelated functions change smoothly.

[Group/single mode switching][Setting method]

Tap

Tap

Tap
ŏGroup mode (Gr)The same setting contents are set to allthe Áight conditions.
ŏSingle mode (Singl)
Set this mode when the setting contents
are not linked with other conditions.

170 ＜ Data ＞

1. Switch to the condition you want to set
and tap the delay[ 0 (value)].
2. Set the delay using the " ▼▼ " " ▼ " " ▲ ""ʆʆ" buttons
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)(When the value is tapped, the delay is reset to the initialvalue.)

ŲƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑƖŃƕƈƏƄƗƈƇŃƗƒŃƲƑƈŃƗƘƑƌƑƊŃŹŵ
Operation mode selection*The operation modes which can beselected depend on the function.

VR selection

Rate adjustment[Setting method]
1. Control selection
Tap the [Control] "--" button to call the<Hardware select> screen, and then selectthe switch and its ON direction.
2. Mode selection
Tap the [Mode] button, and then select themode ([LIN.], [ATL+], [ATL-], or [SYM.]).
3. Rate adjustment
Tap the [Rate] "value" button.
Set the rate using the " ▼ ▼ " " ▼ " " ▲ ""ʆʆ" buttons(Fine tuning VR operation position)[Fine tuning VR operation mode][LIN.] M i x i n g r a t e 0  a t c e n t e r o f V R .
When the VR is turned clockwise andcounterclockwise, the mixing rateincreases and decreases, respectively.
[ATL+] Mixing rate 0 at left end of VR.
When the VR is turned, the mixing rateincreases.
[ATL-] Mixing rate 0 at right end of VR.
When the VR is turned, the mixing rateincreases.
[SYM.] When the VR is turned to the left or
right of the neutral position, the mixing
rate increases.

Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -100~+100
(When the value is tapped, the rate is reset to the initialvalue.)

LIN.

ATL+ ATL-

SYM.

After setting, press a H/E button＜ Data ＞ 171

ŲƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑƖŃƕƈƏƄƗƈƇŃƗƒŃƖƈƕƙƒŃƖƓƈƈƇ

Linear（First）
0 〜 27（Slowly）

In case of Linear

Servo speed setting
The servo speed at each function
operation (including flight condition
switching) can be adjusted. The servos
operate smoothly at a fixed speed
corresponding to the set speed. The
operating speed (In side) and return speed(Out side) can be set individually.

In
Speed

Out
Speed

"Linear" mode: Used with functions
which hold the operation position of
the throttle and switch channel, etc.
[Setting method]
1. Select the mode ([Linear] or[Symmetry]). Each time the button istapped, it toggles between [Linear]and [Symmetry].
2. Tap the In or Out Speed button andset the servo speed.

Out speed

Symmetry

Switch the operation mode according
to the set function.
"Symmetry" mode: Used with ailerons
and other self neutral functions.

In speed

In
Speed

In
Speed

Out
Speed

Out
Speed
In case of Symmetry
In speed

Initial value: 0
Setting range: 0~27

172 ＜ Data ＞

Out speedŦƘƕƙƈŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƒƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑ

This section describes the setting procedure of curves which are used with the AFR function and eachmixing function.
Curve type selection
Four types of curves (EXP1, EXP2, Point andSpline) can be selected.

Curve type selection
1. Tap the button of the curve type youwant to use.
*The curve type changes and the display
returns to the original screen.
[EXP1]: EXP1 curve[EXP2]: EXP2 curve[Point]: point curve[Spline]: spline curve＜ Data ＞ 173

Setting by curve type
When the curve type is selected as described above, adjustment items corresponding to the curve typeappear on the screen. Adjust each curve as described below.
EXP1/EXP2 curve adjustment(EXP1 curve)

vertical direction]
1. Tap to the [Offset] setting item.
2. Move the curve in the vertical direction
using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ" buttons
Initial value: +0.0
(When the value is tapped, the rate is reset to the initialvalue.)

U s i n g t h e E X P 1 c u r v e i s e ff e c t i v e i nsmoothing starting of the ailerons, elevator,
rudder, etc.
(EXP2 curve)*[Separ.] mode: Normal setting*[Comb.] mode: Creates a left and rightsymmetrical curve.

Using the EXP2 curve is effective in engine
rise and other engine control.
The curve left and right rates ([Rate A], [RateB]) and EXP curve rate ([EXP A], [EXP B]) canbe adjusted individually. ([EXP] for EXP2)
The curve can also be offset horizontally([Offset]) in the vertical direction.
[Rate setting]
1. Tap to the [Rate A], [Rate B], [EXP A], or [EXP
B] setting item.
2. Set the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons
Initial value: +100.0 (rate)/+0.0 (EXP rate)*Initial value differs depending on function.

Adjustment range: -200.0~+200.0 (rate)/100.0~+100.0 (EXP rate)(When the value is tapped, the rate is reset to the initialvalue.)[Offsetting the curve horizontally in the

174 ＜ Data ＞

Point curves or spline curves of up to 11/17 points
can be used. (Initial value: 7/9 points) The set
points can be freely increased, decreased, andoffset.
Point addition method
1.Open the screen of a mixing curve with thecurve function.

5. Press "Rate" and use the up/down arrows toadjust the rate points up or down.

The kind of mixing curve

Point deletion method
1. Use the move between points button [ł ]or [ń ]and select the point. (The red point ʄ is theselected point.)

The red point（■）
moves (to green point)

2.Tap the "Position" button.
Move between
point
A red mark（ □ ）moves freely

2. Tap the [Remove] button. (The selected
point becomes an outlined point Ō )3. Use the move between points button [ł ]or [ń ]. *The point is deleted.
3. Tap the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ" button andselect the position (mark Ō) you want to
add.
4. When the "Add" is tapped, the point is
added.（Ō）ń（ʄ）*A new point is created.

＜ Data ＞ 175

Curve setting operation Spline curve
A smoother curve is made.
Setting method is same at spline and point.
Point

SplineUp to 11 or 17 points curve can be used.
(differs with function)
Initial point number: 9 points (17 points
curve), 7 points (11 points curve)*The set points can be freely increased, decreased, andoffset.

[Rate adjustment of each point]

Spline curve

1. Tap to theitemand select the point whose
rate you want to set.
*The mark on the curve shows
the currently selected point.

2. T a p t o t h e [ R a t e ]item. And set the rateusing the "ʈʈ" "ʈ""ʆ" "ʆʆ" buttons
The kind of mixing curve

Point curve (Point) adjustment(Point)Up to 11 or 17 points curve can beused. (differs with function)
Initial point number: 9 points (17points curve), 7 points (11 points
curve)

176 ＜ Data ＞

Repeat steps 1 through 2 and adjust the
curve.

*[Separ.] mode: Normal setting*[Comb.] mode: Creates a left and rightsymmetrical curve.

ŶƚƌƗƆƋŃƖƈƏƈƆƗƌƒƑŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ

The various functions used in the FX-36 can be selected by switch. The switch (including when stick,trim lever, or VR are used as a switch) setting method is common to all functions.
Switch selection
When a switch is selected at a mixing function, etc., the selection screen shown below is called.

(Switch selection screen example)

7

$ %( )

/' 5'

&'*+

- 6,
/6 56 6-
7
7
7

7

-
-

Tap the chosen
switch.

7

When switch is selected

When stick, trim lever, or VR is selected.

Switch ON/OFF setting is possible at eachposition.

When a stick, trim lever, or VR is used as aswitch, the following 4 modes can be selected.

1. When the ON/OFF "Set" position switch istapped after the switch was selected, thescreen shown below appears.

Next page

Normal or Alternate: Alternate switchingmode is available depending on mixing
function.
*When the button of each position is tapped,
it toggles between ON and OFF.
2. Tap the button and set to the ON position.
3. Close the screen by tapping [Hardware
select].

＜ Data ＞ 177

Hysteresis-type and box-type can be selected in a hardware select screen.
When a stick, trim lever, or VR is used as a switch, the following 4 modes can be selected.

◆ Linear・Hysteresis mode

◆ Symmetry・Hysteresis modeThis setting method selects function ON/OFF basedon the set point. Hysteresis (dead band) can be set
to ON and OFF. The ON and OFF positions can bereversed with the Reverse button.

The operation is the same as the linear hysteresis
mode, but left and right (up and down) operations are
symmetrical about the neutral position. For example,
when you want to switch DR1 with the aileron stick,when the stick is moved to the left or right, DR1 canbe turned ON at the same left and right position.

◆ Linear・Box mode

◆ Symmetry・Box modeThis mode turns on the switch within a range of 2 points.
Each point can be set. The ON and OFF positions can bereversed with the Reverse switch.

The operation is the same as the linear box mode,
but left and right (up and down) operation issymmetrical about the neutral position.

178 ＜ Data ＞

When shifting the ON/OFF point
The ON/OFF and hysteresis (dead band) boundary point (there
are 2 points: top and bottom) position can be shifted. ON/OFF ispossible at a free position.

◆ Area Green：ON◆ Area Red：OFF◆ Area Yellow：Hysteresis (Dead band)[ Setting method ]1. Move the stick, etc. tothe point you want to shift
and touch the [ON/OFF]button. The boundary
points change.

Reverse of ON/
OFF direction

Current stick position[ Setting method] → Box Type● Symmetry

1. Move the stick to the point
you want to shift upper side.
2. Touch the [Upper] button.
The boundary points
change.
3. Move the stick to the point
you want to shift lower side.
4. Touch the [Lower] button.
The boundary points
change.

When Upper(Lower) is set, at thesame time, Lower(Upper) is also set.

Hysteresis ：Hysteresis (dead band) can be set to ON and OFF[Setting method] → Linear Type● Symmetry

1. Move the stick to the off
point you want to shift andtouch the [OFF] button. The
off points change.
2. Move the stick to the on
point you want to shift andtouch the [ON] button. The
on points change.
When Upper (Lower) isset, at the same time,
Lower (Upper) is also set.

＜ Data ＞ 179

Logic switch (Condition select and DG1, DG2)
The logic switch function lets you turn operation on and off by combining two switches. For instance,
the condition is activated when 2 switches are turned on.
Logic mode
AND: When both switches are ON, thecondition is ON.
OR: When either switch is ON, the condition
is ON.
EX-OR: When the two switches are indifferent states, the condition is ON.

Switch mode selection
1. Tap to the [Mode] "Single" item.
(Logic switch setting screen)

Switch selection
1. Select the switch A and B.

Logic mode selection
1. Tap to the [Logic] item.
2. Select the logic mode.

180 ＜ Data ＞

ŸƓƇƄƗƌƑƊ
Your Futaba FX-36 transmitter programming can be updated easily online. When functions are added
or improved, the update ¿le can be downloaded from our website. Copy the update ¿les to the SD cardand then use the following procedure to update the program.
Check our web site for the FAQ regarding updating for more information.
Updating procedure
Note: If the battery fully discharges during
program updating, updating will fail. Whenthe remaining battery capacity is 50 orless, always recharge the battery before
updating.
Note: The model data in the transmitter canbe used unchanged after updating, but tobe safe, back up the model data before
updating.

5. Insert the SD card with "FUTABA" folder that
contained the update software into the SD
card slot on your FX-36 radio transmitter.

1. Download the zip file of the update datafrom our website.

Futaba WEB
FX-36 Update Zip ﬁleDownload

Installed SD card of the
update ﬁle

6. Turn on the transmitter power while pressing
down the "H/E" button. The update screen
appears on the LCD display of your FX-36
and the software update is started.

2. Extract the zip Àle on your computer.
3. The "FUTABA" folder will be created on yourcomputer.

2
1

4. Copy the "FUTABA" folder into your SD card.

Press the H/E switch and turn on
Copy the "FUTABA"
folder into your SD card.

Updating
Note: If the SD card has already had "another
FUTABA" folder before you make a copy, the"FUTABA" folder is OVERWRITTEN.

＜ Data ＞ 181

7. When the software update is completed,"Completed" message is shown on the LCD
display of your FX-36. (Show below picture.)

Complete

8. Turn off the power switch of your FX-36 andremove the SD card from the card slot.

Possible Problems'RQ W DEVROXWHO\ UHPRYH WKH EDWWHU\
DQG WKH 6' FDUG IURP WKH WUDQVPLWWHUGXULQJWKHXSGDWHThere is a possibility that the transmitter
will be damaged.
Recovering a failed update
If you failed to update for any reason, it
may transmitter will not start.
In that case, please update againtransmitter in the following procedure.
1. Detach the battery from the transmitter.
2. Insert the SD card that contained the
update Àles to the transmitter.
3. Attach the battery to the transmitter
while pressing down the "H/E" button.
4. The update will start.
Even after the above steps, if thetransmitter fails to update or does notstart, please have it serviced.

When one of the error messages shown
below appears on the LCD screen yourFX-36, the software update will not becompleted.

"Low battery."
Software update is postponed becauseof low battery. Retry the software updateafter the battery is recharged.

8SGDWHÀOHQRWIRXQGThe FX-36 cannot Ànd the update Àle on the
SD card. Check to be sure all the updateÀles have been copied onto the SD card.

%URNHQÀOHThe FX-36 detects the update Àle error. The
update file may be broken or for anothertransmitter.

"Write error."The software update procedure is stopped
for an unknown reason. Contact your local
service center when this error message
appears on the LCD screen of your FX-36.

182 ＜ Data ＞

Initiali]ation of ¿nal means
Note: In the unlikely event that model data
is damaged and can not be set, thecurrent model data can be initialized by
the following method.
Note: Do not use it except when data is
corrupted.
1. Turn off the power of the transmitter.
2. Hold the H/E button and the U/M Button
at the same time, turn on the transmitter
power.
3. An initialization warning screen appears.
4. Touch Yes to initialize and turn off thepower. Since the current model data is
initialized, please reconfigure from the
beginning and check the operationsufÀciently.

FX-22/FX-30/T14SG/T12FG ĺFX-36 MODEL DATA CONVERSION
The model data (only latest version) of FX-22/FX-30/T14SG/T12FG can be copied to FX-36.
* SD card is required.
* The model data of FX-36 cannot be copied to FX-22/FX30/T14SG/T12FG.
* Functions in FX-22/FX-30/T14SG/T12FG, functions not
in FX-36 are not converted.

[Model data conversion method]
1. Attach an SD card that contains model dataof FX-22/FX-30/T14SG/T12FG to the SD slot ofa FX-36.
2. Turn on the power switch, and the Data
Converter should run.

5. The converter can accept model data
made by FX-22/FX-30/T14SG/T12FG with thelatest software only. If you try to convert
model data made by old version software,
the converter must fail to convert and show
the following error message. If this message
is shown, do the following procedure to
update the model data in order to avoid
this limitation.

(a) First, update a FX-22/FX-30/T14SG/T12FG to the latest
software.
(b) Load the model data which failed to convert into the FX22/FX-30/T14SG/T12FG with the latest software, and themodel data should be updated to the latest format.
(c) Save the updated model data to a SD card.
(d) Retry to convert the updated model data on a FX-36.

3. The converter shows a list of model data inthe card. Select a model data that you wantto convert and push "CONVERT" → "Yes" key,
and the converter should begin convertingdata.
4. If the convert succeeds, the converter willshow the following message. The converted
data are copied to the internal memoryof the FX-36. Hence, if the FX-36 does nothave available space in its internal memory,converts must fail.

* When SD card cannot be recognized, it may be able tobe used if it reformats by SD formatter offered from SD
Association.
SD formatter is downloadable from SD Association
https://www.sdcard.org/ (As of June, 2017)

CAUTION
After ¿nishing data copy, be sure to perform acomplete check of operation with the model tobe used.
Check well all the directions of operation andall the operation switches.

Important: Always check the operation of
the model prior to Àight.

FUTABA CORPORATION
Makuhari Techno-Garden Bldg. B-6F, 1-3 Nakase, Mihama-ku, Chiba, 261-8555, Japan
Phone: +81-43-296-8259, Facsimile: +81-43-296-8253©FUTABA CORPORATION

2017, 10 (1)＜ Data ＞ 183